Home

S2T User Manual Part 2 - Automated Electric Systems Ltd

1. 4 5622662 seouenbes snoeuejnuuis GE ayam I SR seouenbes snoeuegjnuuis uoueJq y UluiM sirop enpiwipur pue sdas suonisueJ III sro 1 seouenbes snoeuejnuuis junoo uoueJg ay si u C C ST i gro ID 59u Bi AIq mn seouenbes snoeuejnuuis I sro seouenbes snoeuejnuuis seouenbes sdeis pejoeuuoo aU I E sejeAo sno uel null p ui nov JNWIS sro uonoejes eouenbes uoueuq P oun uiu Silel p Si BS III 2 enpiaipur pue sd ls I uonoejes eouenbes suonisueJ L E E f junoo uoueJg ay si u d MS 1 9u Bi AIq Sab Murs uonoejes eouenbeg Auoud ue an sauo9 uonipuoo T I eoueBuieaiq Sab UOnlISUEJ v YOIUM 40 0015 ay uonoejes u nb s uono l s sdeis pajoauuos e1e es Huowe uloij sri ON aun tewuns uolyejuasaiday aweN dnoio uonnoex3 sdeis Jo JjequinN NL suononuisu 94S 292 V series S2T Index A Anunclatorrelay aa EE Automatic I O allocation Auxiliary device R thes Auxiliary register RW CIMAS EE EE Computer link parameters Gotistani SCAM caia acid
2. XVVO00 Numerical Setting Device XW001 Switches X0000 X0010 Emergency stop normally ON 01 11 Fault reset 02 m 12 Start 03 J 13 Stop 04 14 05 15 gt 1 06 x10 16 07 J 17 08 18 LSO 09 5 19 LS1 BA 2509 1A LS2 OB J 1B LS3 oc 1C Answerback forward 0D 3 1D Answerback reverse OE x10 1E OF J 1F 42 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 Programming Example YW002 Numerical Display Device YW003 Lamps YW004 Motor Y0020 Y0030 Fault Y0040 Forward 21 dE 31 Preparation complete 41 Reverse 22 32 Operating 42 23 J 33 Operation complete 43 24 34 44 25 35 45 sil 10 36 46 27 37 47 28 38 48 29 3 39 49 oa 19 3A 4A 2B J 3B 4B 2C 3C 4C 2D 3D 4D ag 9 3E 4E 2F 3F 4F User s manual Functions 43 6 Programming Example PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 3 Sample program 6 Input H Output 6 Input Output Input tt Output Input 4 Input 3 rov m Output Counter input o Yn Output Enable input Input 1 en 8 Output Input 1 co Output Input cs H IH ven E 44 V series S2T A sample program of this sequence are shown on the following pa
3. Execution condition Input Operation Output OFF Initialization OFF ON Execute PID every setting interval ON when execution Operand Device Register a Index Name X Y ISILIR Z T IC II O X Y ISILRWITICIDIFII IO JI K VV VV IVV WW WIW Top of input ALIR NN IN IN N IN JN EN JN N y Top of ee jJ IN IN N IN JN IN JN N y Cl marae Viv N IN JN viv N N y Input data Control parameter Output data A Process input value vc B Proportional gain Kp C Manipulation value MV A 1 A mode set value ASV B4 1 Integral time T C 17 Last error 8 54 A 2 C mode set value CSV B 2 Derivative time C 2 Last derivative value D A 3 M mode MV input MMV B 3 Dead band GP C 3 Last PV PV A 4 MV tracking input TMV B 4 A mode initial SV ISV C 4 Last SV SV A 5 Mode setting MODE B 5 Input filter constant FT C 5 Integral remainder Ir B 6 ASV differential limit DSV C 6 Derivative remainder Dr B 7 MMV differential limit DMMV C 7 Internal MV MV A mode Auto mode B 8 Initial status STS C 8 Internal counter C C mode Cascade mode B 9 MV upper limit MH C 9 Control interval At M mode Manual mode B 10 MV lower limit ML B 11 MV differential limit DMV B 12 Control interval setting n User s manual Functions 243 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Control block diagram Integral control
4. Section 3 2 Function Type Cu Para Quantity 5 nput register XVV XW001 Output register YW Total YW034 Direct input register IW 512 words IVV001 Direct output register OW OW034 Input device X X001 A Output device Y Total Y0348 Direct input device 8192 points 10012 Direct output device O O0340 Auxiliary register RW 1 000 999 1000 vvords RVV100 Auxiliary device R 0000 999F 16000 points R1001 Special register SVV 1 000 255 256 vvords SVV014 Special device S 0000 255F 4096 points S0140 Timer register T 000 999 1000 vvords T030 Timer device T 000 999 1000 points T 030 Counter register C 000 511 512 words C199 Counter device C 000 511 512 points C 199 Data register D 0000 8191 8192 words D4055 Link register W 0000 2047 2048 words W0200 Link device Z 0000 999F 16000 points Z2001 Link relay register LW 0000 255 256 words LW123 Link relay L 0000 255F 4096 points L123F File register F 0000 32767 32768 words F0500 1 word Index register J None 1 word J K None 1 word K __ NOTE VAV In the S2T 1 word is treated as equal to 16 bits and the number of registers is counted in word units 1 54 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data 3 2 Registers and devices The following Tables describe the functions and address ranges for each function type of registers and devices Input registers and Input devices Input registers an
5. Integral Auto 1 x mode Ti s ASV e MVn gue mg Proportional d Differential AMVn MVOn n s En 1 aba Kp wvs H L P DMV 7 A MV cv E xc DET loas Cascade Derivative aue mode TD s ADn anual E Differential limit mode PVn MVS Velodty gt Position i PVC MVn MVn 1 gt AMVn Wa H L Upper lower limit Digital filter DMV Differential limit Integral action control When MV is limited H L DMV and the integral value has same sign as limit over integral action is stopped Velocity Position conversion In Direct mode MV increases when PV is increased gt MV MV AMV In Reverse mode MV decreases when PV is increased gt MV MV AMV Gap dead band operation Error e Algorithm Digital filter PV 1 FT PVC FT DNA Here 0 000 lt FT lt 0 999 244 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language PID algorithm AMV Kp AP A AD MV MV AMV Here e eh e SV PV If GP Gap is applied e At Ir Al 2 fT Al 0 AD Tp PV PV At Daa Dr E At n TD D AD n 0 1 Fixed Parameter details A Process input value PVC 0 00 to 100 00 Data range 0 to 10000 A 1 Auto mode set value ASV 0 00 to 100 00 96 Data range 0 to 10000 A 2 Cascade mode s
6. 253 Network data send SEND 259 Network data receive RECV 263 Last ergeet lanes Sedna tether eret edge 267 Y 293 User s manual Functions 11 Contents 1 2 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 1 Overview 1 1 System design Normally the design of a control system to which the S2T is applied is procedures carried out by the following procedure System Planning v System Designing v Detailed Designing Y Y System Wiring Program Designing Y Input Output Programming Operation Check Y Program Loading Y Debugging Y Combination Test Test Run Y Program Storing Y Hot Run Study the configuration of the control system and device configurations including PLC selection Thoroughly study the operation sequence of the system and the abnormal sequence Study the interfaces between S2T I O modules and external devices and determine the types of I O modules Create the S2T program according to the system operation sequence Enter the program by using the T series programmer T PDS Load the program into the S2T Carry out the
7. 32 System Information 33 User program oio ee d cta gu Pe inde 34 Program execution 560 46 6 36 User Data nico 37 User data types and functions 37 Conditions for data initialization 40 Programming Example 41 le 41 Input output alocada 42 Sample program Esc teint ERR ERU nent 44 Programming procedure cre re rto s 48 User s manual Functions 7 Contents PART 2 FUNCTIONS 8 V series S2T 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 4 3 2 5 2 6 3 1 3 2 3 3 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 4 1 5 5 5 6 5 7 OVCIVIOW E 73 S2T System configuration 73 Functional specifications 74 Internal Operation 75 Basic internal operation How 75 System initialization_ ica 76 n EE 78 SCAN CONTO csi 83 EECH ds 85 Batch I O processing cre ete ae RR Kin 87 Timer update ee E Er ebe 89 Peripheral support ridad 90 Programming support functions 91 User Program Execution Control 94 Progra TV DOS o cm eq tuto A etu 94 Main sub programs execution control
8. Send requesting RW050 00 1 0 RWO51 0 User s manual Functions 261 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION TOSLINE S20LP Station No 3 S2T self station S2T target station RW100 D1000 RW 101 D1001 RW227 D1127 When RO020 is ON 128 words data starting with RW100 is transferred to D1000 and after of the S2T on which station No 3 S20LP is installed When the operation is completed the status is set in RVVO50 and instruction output comes ON NOTE VAV e Keep the input ON until the output comes ON e This instruction becomes error complete in the following cases ERF S0051 is set to ON 1 Target station No is invalid for S20LP 2 Invalid register designation In case of T and C registers T gt T and C C is only possible 3 Source destination register address range is out of valid range 4 Destination register is write protected b Response time out is occurred e By using SVV067 register write protect is available against SEND instruction of other S2T F 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SW067 sw c T F D Rw tw w vw 0 Write enable 1 Write protect Both F register in CPU and expanded F register in IC card e Resetting the status register operand B is necessary at the first scan e When using the TOSLINE S20LP or Ethernet module EN611 EN631 read the
9. suononuisu uonoun J suononuisu ureJ6eiq Jeppe User s manual Functions 281 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 948 uoneAnoe y deis 77 e s ye noe pue y deis 94S eu Woy sd ls u y st s i v u zas H ezyenut 948 us uomnonjisur 3y NO 01 440 wos peBueuo 51 Indu u uAA NO v lA p suuni pue Suni owes ay uo suononuasul indu eouenbes Vs e deis uiM eui 440 suuni H Indino ou nb s dels Sy sabe uononjjsul eui NO S Indu ueuM dos euo NO S y pue d NO St indu ueuw NO indino sun v E indui eouenbes deis opt eouenbes deis jo uoneAgoe 1102 NO v suum pue y ouwen v u aus ezienui eouenbes del vy Aq pepeeu seoi ep u eui 440 Suny 022 z au uonoejep Jano euin ueos ay spuajx3 10M jose jeu 6opuoireM EtL L 1dnuu lul eui JO pue eui sereoipu 1381 pue 1dnueju 221 DEG L we1Bo1d 1dnuejur ay JO uonnoexe s jqes q q jdnuejur ejgesiq pi 0115 idnil lul ay jo uonnoexe sejqeu3 1a yinu lul ejgeu3 Or L L IVH 01 uonnoexe urej amp o1d y sdois dois dois 861 SE L z uu Jaquunu unnouiqns eui o eoueJjue eui sajes1pul H uu ugns H Aus eunnoaqng Ze 907 L 1X3N LX3N
10. 1 uosueduuoo m SCH a 1 8 s w 1 w 1 NO 1ndino Sun de 48 0 4 m 10 uey seet i v r yqnoq 9 uosueduuoo 1e861u y Bua ajqnop 1 8 1 6 g 1 g gt v 1 V 4 NO 3ndino sun 1 9 gt a ve ueu ssa ul u r lqnoq 901 uosueduuoo 8 1 6 g 1 g V 1 v 4 NO Indino sun a 1 8 lt gt a v v H ou ul6u l elqnoq 501 uosueduuoo x z ECH 1 6 ta ao eo s ni 8 1 8 a W 1 w ul6u l qnoq rot uosueduuoo Sn tallo dut ye a cis a 1 8 z w 1 w 1 NO 1ndino sun HI lt 0 v7 Lav 10 uey s s i5 uiBue ojgnoq 20 uosueduuoo 1e861u y Bua ajqnop ECH 1 6 g 1 g lt v 1 V NO ndino sur 8 1 8 a i v weu 201 86 9 GE uosuedujoo 1961941 g s v J NO 1ndino sun a gt y jenba uey sse1 LOL 869 9 6 uosueduuoo 1 g v 1 NO 1ndino suni a gt v uey 8597 001 869 9 6 uosueduioo 4 II NO 1ndino sun v H enba 10N 66 96 9 S uosueduioo 196198u1 g v 41 NO 1ndino suin 6 v lenbzi 86 86 9 GE uosueduoo 1961941 g e v J NO 1ndin
11. UOWWOD eui 5 x a 601 v x uuuebo1 621 8 1 8 u y sejois pue y jo Frei EE eme 1 9 axa v uonoun enueuodx3 844 g ul y seJojs ueui 001 Aq enjeA jueBuel reng 9 6 Oooo ika CY JO EA SI Send a Nviv v Luet uonouny jueBuei ouv 221 g ul y seJ01s 4 1 001 Aq enjeA euisoo 996 9 6 a S L a soov v 500 uogoury euisoo 921 a ut y se101s uey 001 Aq enje euis ere S e EEN a nisy v NIS uonoun euis SZL 00001 q en eA 1ueBue sy pue S 09 9 6 001 Aq v anea eui Aq peureiqo a nva v NYL uonoun jueBue v44 ejBue y Dune Aq paurejgo anjea y g ul se1o1S uonoun sn ip peunbejeumn sdeis Kreuiungs uonejueseJdeu SUEN N dnog uonnoex3 joJequinwN Nr suononuisu uonoun J suononuisu ureJ6elq Jeppe User s manual Functions 285 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language I 8 L g ut v L v 921 o eyep 1urod Buneoy eyep uorsjeAui uis eui 591015 8 1 8 DINA V 1 v uois4eAur uis jurod Buyeo 4 202 a Gil ul wl ii l Bulleoj Jo enjeA einjosqe ou sesos 8 1 8 seva v 1 v enea ainjosge iurod Bupeoj 902 a 1 8 ul y Ses0 s pue ejep ulBu l i
12. quiod Buneo y ziz y uosueduuoo JaBajul pauBisun 869 GE gs v JI NO 1ndino sun 8 f v jenbe 10 ugy ssa p ubisun ELL uosueduuoo 1eBejui peuBisun 869 9 6 50 a gt n v H uey paubisun 21 paubisun 969 g NO di suni a lt gt n jenba jou peubisun LLL peubisun _ 869 9 6 a n g J peubisun 011 uosueduuoo Jaba ul peuBisun enba 869 9 6 ge v 1 NO 1ndino sun le n v F Jo uey sayees6 p uBisun 60 uosueduuoo 1eBejui p uBisun 86 9 9 6 50 uc Hino Sunt a lt n v uey s yc f paubisun 801 iios sn peuinbo4 6 peunbe eu sd ls Kreuiungs uonejueseJdeH SUEN N dnog JoJequinN NI suononuisu uonoun J suononuisu ureJ6eiq Jeppe User s manual Functions 279 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language g 1 g Ul ynse eui sajo s pue y 1 y ul DER 9 ul5u l lqnop eui ui sliq NO JO 4equunu y sjunoo x a oga v P lunoo iq ul6u l lqnoq gz g ul Ins i ay s iols tie pue v u ayy u sq NO 10 Jequinu eu siunoO TL oa v ER AAO 01 1se1 ay ile 5195 pue NO 01 FOE p e v 48181681 jo syiq u eui q pereorpur uonisod 1iq 8 u 93a v
13. o cot es Data display example 2 Trend graph D29888 g h o 1 1458 Sampling range 1 1488 Tata range Integer 1 B 60883 gfe RUN urs am arget LA ELS Data display example 3 Timing chart 1 iaga 58841 mmm mu TH HE l Ta q veles MO ro pu DO t P k er YB196 i CH Sampling range 1 E1488 PIN XOK EE A Rang et 1 1 8 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 RAS Functions 5 7 Status latch function The status latch function will transfer the specified devices registers data in batches to the internal latch data storage area when the latch condition set by the programmer is fulfilled or when the Status latch instruction STLS is executed The latch condition is evaluated and data collected at the end of the scan However when the STLS instruction is executed the data collection is carried out at the time of the instruction is executed Latched data can be displayed on the programmer The latched status can be reset by the latch reset command of the programmer or by executing the Status latch reset instruction STLR The latch target and condition setting screen is shown below 1 Latch Condition E9289011 Unsign Sign 2 Latch Execution States READY 3 Latch Target ee ee ee ee Te 7 xBaga B xB847 31 X90314 181 XA816
14. uum 1uDu oO 512 u 98 976 End nsa eui o seDueuo Se Aueo eu Sel Aveo ay Buipnjour uonoeurp GSW uei eui 0 liq v u erep eui sejejoy v ionu Aug yum YO 91101 4q 98 sri aun uonno xg sd ls Jo JOQUINN aweN ON NI dno suononuisu uonoun suomnonuisu urej6erq 19ppe7 276 V series S2T 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION O 61 m Lee 9 G eui q pepeeu u ezis jo lq eui jo 1q yg eui o a u wig v FE JejsueA SJqe1 11g 66 ul WAU saJojs pue y BDIABP eui JO sjuejuoo ay sexe O KI 9 G ay u 11 seJojs pue v 1948 6941 out Aq pepeeu spiow o g u wau v 9 SUB lq lqel 26 u ZIS JO e qe1 y JO peeu ay wo 110 ula eui sexer 9 m 6192 9 5 JejsibeJ ay Aq papeay u ezis jo ejqei eui jo JejsiDeJ o a u Xda v 16 ula eui u y 1eisiBe1 eui jo sjuejuoo ay S910 S sn peuinbo4 o aun sd ls Kreuiung uonejueseJdeu SUEN N dnog uolno xz JO JequinN NN suononuisu uonoun suomnonuisu urej6erq 19ppe7 User s manual Functions 277 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language
15. 95 Interrupt programs execution control 102 Peripheral Memory Support Functions 104 Flash Memory EEPROM support 104 Expansion memory support 105 RAS EN eS 106 Overview iiM RE 106 Selr diagrnosls ii iia 106 Event TilstoPy ica 110 Power interruption detection function 112 Hot restart Uco oidos 112 Execution status monitoring 113 Sampling trace function src coi 114 Status latch function uico ta 119 5 8 5 8 1 5 8 2 5 8 3 5 9 5 10 Contents Debug support function iii iin 120 Face UNC Need NN 120 Online program changing function 120 DEBUG mode functions eet ER ttn p Rn 121 System ClAGNOSIICS us runas 128 Password function User s manual Functions 9 Contents PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 1 0 V series S2T 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 2 4 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 KEEN ere 135 Butts OM e N eto Come pbi aca UR ENS 135 User memory configuration 135 User Program Configuration 137 Overview nea Ts BE 137 System info
16. n 5 n 4 n3 n 2 n1 n Data N 1 Data N amp Sum CR LM lt 2 ES 2 b 7 Can be shortened Can be omitted ADR Station address 01 to 32 Starting register For 8 k words per bank F0000 to F8191 Upper case F For 64 k vvords per bank f0000 to f65535 bank 1 gt Lower case f 10000 to f57343 bank 2 Bank For 8k words per bank 1 to 15 For 64k words per bank 1to7 Data Data in hexadecimal N Number of registers to be read 1 to 61 61 words max Sum Check sum Response message format S2T Host 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 191 Status amp Sum CR Status S2T operation status 236 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language MOIE VAV 1 The maximum message text length is limited to 255 bytes 2 Shortening expression for starting register bank number and data MW only are available E g F9 for F00009 When shortening expression is used the maximum number of MW command can be increased more than 46 words In this case it is limited by the maximum message text length 255 bytes 3 When an error has occurred error response CE or EE is returned f designated register or bank is out of the effective range EE115 register no size error is returned 4 For general information of computer link function refer to T
17. lower line 4 A combination of 2 and 1 Zut 4 5 N Z 3 above 2 B Be N 7 7 NOTE VAV 1 The block numbers need not be consecutive In other words there may be vacant blocks in the middle 2 The rung numbers must be consecutive In other words vacant rungs cannot be programmed in the middle PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 5 User Data 5 1 User data types and Data stored in the RAM memory of the CPU and which can be referred functions directly in a user program such as the states of input output signals control parameters and arithmetical results during execution of the user program are called user data From the viewpoint of treatment user data can be considered as divided into registers and devices Registers are locations which store 16 bit data The following types are available according to their functions Code Name Function Number Address Range Stores input data from the input module batch input Stores output data to the output XW Input register XW000 XW511 YW 1 Output register YW000 YW511 module batch output Total WW Direct input register Direct input data from the input 1 512 words wo00 IW511 module direct input OW Direct output Direct output data to the output OW000 OW511 register module direct output Used as a temporary memory for RW Auxiliary register results during execution of the 1000 words RWO00 RW999 user program
18. JOU seu uonisue1 ay Ji pue ponad eAnoe ay SiolluO N poued 1es eui uono s xxxx pue eieiei Jeun eui si 1 4 qulnu deis eu 51 n SSSS SISEQ e uo puodsaJo9 uoIuM WesHoud 696 Duipnjoxe XXxx deis HEM uonoe seu y pesdeje seu poued 195 ay un uonisueJ m 1 r ay mo AUEO jou s op uol onusul 511 ni s uloo sue uonipuoo uonisueJi Buipeoejd Ajeyeipeuuuur eui ji U AZI Jequunu oew y si www pue 06 6 Jequunu deis ay 51 ssss uuu Aq papu ureJ604d deis oJoe N y 0 SISeq euo o1 euo e uo spuodseuoo N uuu ssss Jequunu deis erui v si ssss seujoo uonipuoo uonisue4 Buipeoeud BH sss sre e ay u ym deis jemu Buipuodsauoo eui o Buisseooud deis pug suinjey urej604d 24S au JO pue eui sejeoipu uonoe Jequunu deis au 51 00 ssss siseq euo oj euo e uo puodsaeuoo yolym ssss dais surejuoo y 101 U09 jo h n aus eui si SIUL uonoe Jequunu deis ay si ssss siseq 9897 uo o1 uo e uo puodsaJo9 yolym urej6o4d uonoe deis en ssss z Surejuoo pue 2 54S au jo ueis eui sejeorpu L deis 938 uoneAnoe 54S Ge deis en ul y sayeanoe pue welbold 54S Buipeeoons v seit 8v 46 v jo sda s uuuu ay SayeAoe ui uononiulsu HEN OAS y NO 01 440 Woy pebueyo seu y somap ay ueuM N zienul OAS srl oul sd ls tewuns uonej
19. S0025 I O interrupt error Warning ON when unused UO interrupt occurs operation continues S0026 Special module error Warning ON when fault occurs in special module operation continues 0027 0028 0029 S002A S002B S002C S002E S002D S002F Reserve for future use S0030 S0031 S0032 S0033 S0035 S0034 S0036 S0037 S0038 S0039 S003A S003B 5003 S003D S003E S003F Program error Scan timer error Down ON when program error occurs OR condition of SW006 flags ON when scan cycle exceeds the limit value Reserve for future use 1 This area is for reference only Do not write 2 The error flags are reset at the beginning of RUN mode 1 62 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data Special device Name Function S0040 Timing relay 0 1 sec 0 05 sec OFF 0 05 sec ON Cycle 0 1 sec S0041 Timing relay 0 2 sec 0 1 sec OFF 0 1 sec ON Cycle 0 2 sec S0042 Timing relay 0 4 sec 0 2 sec OFF 0 2 sec ON Cycle 0 4 se S0043 Timing relay 0 8 sec C 0 4 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON Cycle 0 8 sec 0044 Timing relay 1 0 sec S0045 Timing relay 2 0 sec 1 0 sec OFF 1 0 sec ON Cycle 2 0 sec S0046 Timing relay 4 0 sec 2 0 sec OFF 2 0 sec ON Cycle 4 0 sec S0047 Timing relay 8 0 se
20. means switching the Operation mode switch to the XX position 3 H XX means issuing of the command XX from the programmer 4 The setting status of the RAM ROM switch and the Operation mode switch at power on are indicated by XX and XX respectively 82 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Internal Operation 2 4 Scan control As explained in 2 3 when the RUN mode transition conditions are fulfilled initial load when necessary user data initialization when necessary UO mounting check program check and scan mode setting are performed and scan control begins In scan control mode control batch I O processing timer update and user program execution are repeated The following diagram shows the scan control flow chart RUN mode transition conditions are fulfilled v Initial load when necessary Y User data initialization when necessary S RUN mode t iti mode transition e UO mounting check process v User program check Y Scan mode setting Y E a O Batch I O processing Y Timer update First scan Y User program execution y 3 v RS e 9 Mode control Batch I O processing Second scan and then Y after repeated L Timer update Y User program execution b eal User s manual Functions 83 2 Internal Operation PART 2 FUNCTIONS O Initial load When
21. Floating point data real number in the range 3 40282 x 105 to 3 40282 x 1059 However there are no dedicated registers corresponding to the types for processing these types of data The processing of the register data varies according to which instruction is used In other words as shown in the following example even when the same register is used if the data type of the instruction differs the processing of the register data will also differ Example When the value of D0005 is HFFFF hexadecimal FFFF 1 In the unsigned comparison instruction Greater than D0005 U gt 100 decision output ON when true The value of D0005 is regarded as 65535 unsigned integer therefore it is judged to be greater than the compared value 100 and the output of the instruction becomes ON 2 In the signed comparison instruction Greater than D0005 100 decision output ON when true The value of D0005 is regarded as 1 integer therefore it is judged not to be greater than the compared value 100 and the output of the instruction becomes OFF In this way since there is no classification of registers by data type it is possible to execute complex data operations provided their use is thoroughly understood However in order to make the program easier to see it is recommended that registers be used by allocation by data types 1 register is processed by 1 data type as far as possible PART 3 PROGRAM
22. 6 Special modules modules which are not designated by X Y X Y iX iY X Y as module types such as data transmission modules do not occupy input output registers 7 Input output registers which are not allocated internally become output registers and can be used in the same way as auxiliary registers relays in the program User s manual Functions 29 3 VO Allocation 3 4 Unit base address setting functions As a special function for input output allocation there is a function which PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING can set the base register address of each unit This function is achieved by the manual UO allocation If this function is used the register address does not shift even when module additions are carried out in the future PUO 1 23 4 5 6 7 PUO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Basic PIC XIXIX X IX X X Expansion i XIX X X X X X FS P 4114141212 12 2 2 F 2121212121212 UIW W W W W W W 1 VV 1VV VV VV Iw Ww W 01 23 4 5 6 7 01 23 4 5 6 7 Expansion P Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Expansion I YI Y Y Y Y Y 1 FIS lalalealealalolo 3 F kabab E t WIWIW VV VV VV W VV 1VV VV WI VV VV Register allocation table U S U S i 5 _ Type Register 7 y Type Register t t t t 0 00 PU 2 60 0 X2W XWO
23. Calls the reader s attention to conditions or practices that could damage the equipment or render it temporarily inoperative Terminology AWG American Wire Gage ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange CPU Central Processing Unit EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory IF Interface VO Input Output LED Light Emitting Diode ms millisecond NEMA National Electrical Manufacture s Association PLC Programmable Controller PS Power Supply RAM Random Access Memory ROM Read Only Memory us microsecond Vac ac voltage Vdc dc voltage 6 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 Contents OVEN VIO WW ARAS 15 System design procedures 15 Basic programming procedures 16 Operation Outline ioco iii 19 Operation modes and lunctions 19 Modes transition conditions eee eeeeeeteeeeeeeeeee 20 Operation flow chart 22 VO AllocatiO EEN 24 ek Weer Le a 24 Input and output registers kee 25 Rules for I O allocation 27 Unit base address setting functions 30 User Program iii a 32 User program configuration
24. Sub 1 operation Sub No Flag Name Function Note Subi S0410 Sub 1 executing 0 Not executing 1 Executing Status Sub 2 S0400 Hot restart mode 0 Normal 1 Hot restart Setting S0403 Special mode 0 Normal 1 Special Setting 0405 Sub 2 mode 0 One time 1 Cyclic Setting S0409 Sub 2 start 0 No request 1 Start request Command SW042 Sub 2 interval Scan number setting for cyclic mode Setting S0411 Sub42 executing 0 Not executing 1 Executing Status S0415 Sub 2 delay 0 Normal 1 Delay Status Sub 3 0406 Sub 3 mode 0 One time 1 Cyclic Setting S040A Sub 3 start 0 No request 1 Start request Command SW043 Sub 3 interval Scan number setting for cyclic mode Setting S0412 Sub 3 executing 0 Not executing 1 Executing Status S0416 Sub 3 delay 0 Normal 1 Delay Status Sub 4 S0407 Sub 4 mode 0 One time 1 Cyclic Setting S040B Sub 4 start 0 No request 1 Start request Command SW044 Sub 4 interval Scan number setting for cyclic mode Setting S0413 Sub 4 executing 0 Not executing 1 Executing Status S0417 Sub 4 delay 0 Normal 1 Delay Status In the above table Setting means the user preset flag for Sub 1 will be executed only once in the first scan before Main Therefore Sub 1 can be used as the initial setting program at the start of the operation exe HALT mode or system initialization First scan Second scan execution mode selection Command means the user control
25. The numerical value range in which unsigned double length integers can be processed is shown in the table on the following page User s manual Functions 183 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 1 84 V series S2T NOTE Both odd numbered addresses and even numbered addresses may be used as register 2 Hexadecimal Expression Numerical Value I Register 1 Register 4294967295 FFFF FFFF 65536 0001 0000 65535 0000 FFFF J d 0 0000 0000 VAV b Double Length Integer This is 32 bit integer which is expressed using 2 consecutive registers Negative numbers are expressed by 2 s complement See 2 Integers The registers are designated in the form 4 1 A becomes the lower and A 1 becomes the upper MSB LSB FE 0 F 0 Bit positions L Register 2 Lower 16 bits 0 E bits of register 1 Upper 15 bits F bit of register A 1 Sign bit positive negative 1 The numerical value is expressed by the 31 bits from bit O of register Oh to bit E of register 1 The sign is expressed by bit F of register B 1 0 when positive 1 when negative Example When a double length integer is processed by registers D1002eD1001 D1001 becomes and D1002 becomes 1 and D1001 is the lower and D1002 is the upper Also the sign is expressed by the bit F of D1002 In pr
26. 1 X 68 2 Xs 5 iY 6 iXeY 7 Z 58 0 E 16 F 322 E ME H 128 lit amp Unit 41 Unit 12 Unit 82 Slot 1m Slot 1 8 Slot 1 0 Slot 1 8 Pu F 1 BI 1 BI I BL IR il 1 1 i if l 2 1 21 1 21 1 21 1 3 3E 1 3 3 al i 41 1 4 l 1 41 1 bol j si 1 5 1 51 1 BI E 6 E E 1 amp 1 7 1 7 7 1 vi BL 8 1 B L 1 i 8 1 3 3 1 1 3 1 3 1 Im 1 18 ia Enter nodule type and register size x Cancel PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 Programming Example Next key in B to designate B 2W DX 4 D Em 8 DX Y 7 Z 8 SP P D a 166 22 G B 1288 g i unit f1l 82 Unit 49 Siar 1 0 Slot IQ Stor 1 0 Slot L n P B L 1 BL i 1 B 1 1 1 1 1 il i it 21 1 z I 2I i 21 1 31 1 3r 1 3 af at 41 1 af 4 1 5 1 5 1 5 5 1 6 B I B 1 T 1 TE 1 71 1 T 1 a I 8 8I 8I 3 8 f 1 af 1 s 1 18 1 la t te iste UH FE n H E F8 FT Fg Fm X 2W is displayed as the module type at the bottom of the screen Set the module type into the slot at the cursor position Key in Enter 5 1Y 6 1X gt Y 7 1 B St E 168 F 32M G 646 H 1288 X 2W is displayed at the Unit 0 Slot O position and the cursor moves
27. VA Next scan begins immediately User s manual Functions 85 2 Internal Operation PART 2 FUNCTIONS The constant scan mode has a specified time cycle for scanning The setup range of the cycle is 10 200 ms 10 ms units Use this scan cycle to avoid variation in scan intervals The action of the constant scan when the cycle is fixed at 50 ms is shown in the following diagram Scan cycle fixed at 50 ms Scan cycle fixed at 50 ms Mode Timer User program Mode lO Timer User program Scan mode selection will be performed by setting up the scan cycle in the system information menu of the programmer To select floating scan do not set up a scan time leave blank With the constant scan scan time can be set up within the range 10 200 ms 10 ms units NOTE VAV In the constant scan if the time for one scan exceeds a specified cycle it will turn to floating scan and the constant scan delay flag special 50008 comes ON Also when the scan time reverts to within the specified cycle the scan cycle will return to the original constant scan Constant scan cycle Constant scan cycle 1 0 Timer User program Mode lO 1 Timer User program Mode 86 V series S2T MA MA Immediately to the next scan Returns to the constant scan PART 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Internal Operation
28. ee y y Sub 2 start S0409 Engl 51 qa tue dr spes Y Sub 3 start S040A 1 Sub 3 executing S0412 Sub 4 start S040B Sub 4 executing S041 3 Start requests to Sub 2 Sub 3 and Sub 4 from Main Sub 2 activated Sub 2 completed and Sub 3 activated SubA3 interrupted and next scan started amp Main completed and Sub 3 re started Sub 3 completed and Sub 4 activated Sub 4 completed and next scan started Start request to Sub 3 from Main O Sub 3 activated Sub 3 completed and next scan started Start request to Sub 2 from Main Sub 2 activated Sub 2 completed and next scan started 98 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS 3 User Program Execution Control Operation example in the constant scan al E c Sub 2 PES li jo Sub 4 stopped e O a e Sub 2 start S0409 E Sub 2 executing 80411 Sub 3 start S040A 1 Y Sub 3 executing S041 2 A Sub 4 start S040B ee e Y Sub 4 executing S0413 AS Start request to Sub 2 from Main Q Sub 2 activated Sub 2 completed Start requests to Sub 3 and Sub 4 from Main Sub 3 activated Sub 3 completed and Sub 4 activated Sub 4 interrupted and next scan started Sub 4 re started O Sub 4 completed User s manual Functions 99 3 User Program Execution Cont
29. 11 Umi Sien H Stop 31 Ussia Sign 1 AFTER 1 4 Trigger Condition 11 11 Unsign Siga i 5 Sampling Disable Enable Disable Enable i 5 Sampling Status Standby Execut ing 1 ina Target lI 1 FL lt bi JI i Device The sampling trace is executed when it is enabled by pressing F3 Enable MOIE VAV The sampling trace can also be started stopped by manually without setting the arm condition F5 Start and F4 Stop are used User s manual Functions 11 5 5 RAS Functions PART 2 FUNCTIONS The setting method for each condition is as follows Arm start condition Statt Unsign Sign L J amp JA X A A Comparison value condition is Condition for register Blank Arm stop condition if reference is register and II 1 Increase 2 Decrease 3 Change for device 1 II Rising OFF ON 2 Falling ON OFF 3 III Change both Reference Register or device Stop Unsign Sign AFTER Arm condition is extended for specified counts of scans Blank TTTTTTT No setting 1 to 65535 T Scan counts Other setting items are the same as the arm start condition 1 1 6 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 RAS Functions Trigger condition Unsign Sign Counts of condition fulfilled Data collection is carried out once per counts times the
30. 7 When the transfer size is odd address in the case of S20 S20LP is set as double word access 8 When the S20 S20LP module is not normal CPU register to 1 When the transfer size is 0 or more than 256 EEPROM 2 When the source destination table of transfer is out of the valid range 3 When the data writing address range exceeds page boundary 4 When this instruction is executed during flash memory access inhibited 10 ms 5 When the CPU does not have flash memory Others 1 When source destination designation is invalid 2 When an invalid transfer combination is designated 3 When the index modification is used for an operand and register boundary error is occurred as the result of the index modification in this case the instruction output comes OFF 258 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 5 6 5 Network data send SEND Expression Function FUN 239 SEND Network data send Input A SEND B H Output This instruction sends the designated range of register data to another S2T through the network Network TOSLINE S20LP or Ethernet The transfer source register self station is designated by A 3 and A44 The transfer destination register target station is designated by A 5 and A 6 The transfer size number of words is designated by A 2 The maximum transfer size is 128 words S20LP or 485 words Ethernet The designation method
31. Computer i lt link 75 RTC LSI 1 Switches LEDs The Main processor controls overall execution tasks The Language processor LP works as co processor and executes the user program bit operation and word operation These two processors work in parallel during scan operation User s manual Functions 73 1 Overview PART 2 FUNCTIONS 1 2 Functional specifications 74 V series S2T Item Control method O method Specification Stored program cyclic scan system Batch I O refresh Direct I O or combination Number of I O points 1024 points when 32 pts I Os are used 2048 points when 64 pts I Os are used Total space 8192 points 512 words Programming language SFC Sequential Function Chart Ladder diagram relay symbol function block Program capacity Memory User Program Instructions 32k steps PU662T 64k steps PU672T Main memory SRAM battery back up Optional memory Flash Memory incl comment space 1 step 24 bits Basic ladder instructions 24 function instructions 206 transfer single length double length register table arithmetic calculation single length double length binary BCD logical operation single length double length register table bit file comparison single length double length sign unsign program control jump FOR NEXT subroutine and others function limit trigonometric integral PID function generator conversion
32. Sp Sri MOUSE qoi issu en eee wie Sa 0 a avau v pees erep einpow jepeds gz 9 jon JejsiBoJ ay Aq payloads Ajjoauipul uoneunsep JejsueJ 2 i eu o v 1319161 ou q p ljio ds Ano uipui oxnos o g 433x v J SEET erep pepuedk SES wee q JeJsueJ y g ezis JO y90 Q y S19JSUEJ lnpouu 5 ay ol uuouj uL 6t L o2 lo Indinonndu no s hie uogonuisul eui v 19481691 v u on F O I 19811Q SEZ ndinoyindul eui Aq pepeeu suajsibei spioA u eui 104 indinoAndu 8 1 8 ul y sejois pue v L v jo erep 1 9 08 ee a 1 9 9074 w 1 w HL uigueoj juod Buneo 4 Lez a 1 48 u y sexois pue v L v 88 9 eren quod B neoii eu 10 enueuodxe eu spur 8 1 8 axaa w 1 w lenueuodxa 1100 Duneo 4 062 sn T peunbe eu sdeis Kreuiung uonejueseJdeu N dnog equinN Nr suononuisu uonoun J suononuisu ureJ6eiq Jeppe User s manual Functions 289 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language poued 195 ay SI xxxx pue Ua sibal jeuun ay v uonoe SI 1 46quunu deis eui si ssss siseq euo oj euo e uo 7 98701 puodsa Jo9 uoiuw wesBoid uoroe surejuo NO 01 y deis uue v S IA D uuej e eui 5195 poled jas ay apeu u q v
33. The above completes the programming procedure f the S2T s RAM ROM switch is put to ROM and the Operation Mode switch is put to RUN the S2T will operate automatically when power is next switched ON NOTE VAV In the case of a CPU with a built in flash memory write the program into the flash memory before the above procedure 10 The operation can be performed by selecting W Program Write from the Memory Management menu See the screen on the procedure 7 User s manual Functions 69 6 Programming Example PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 70 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS PART 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Overview 1 1 S2T System The S2T system configuration is shown in the figure below Part 2 configuration explains the S2T system functions concentrating on the S2T CPU functions Serial TOSLINE S20 Tr 3 or 8 modules Programmer T PDS P leal RS232C Computer link Host RS485 m computer Basic unt 6 T Ll o o s A CTO 41618 modules A e T1 FAA Expansion cable Expansion unit S2T ST FVUHS r max 3 units TOSLINE F10 The internal block diagram of the S2T CPU is shown below Flash Memory User User System System program data ROM RAM memory memory I O bus Language processor 1 O modules
34. UO interrupt 1 UO interrupt programs are activated by interrupt signals 1 O interrupt 8 generated from I O modules with interrupt function Set interval i Set interval Interrupt conditions gt lt Timer 1 0 1 Timer 1 O 4 1 0 2 Timer Timer interrupt 1 i Scan control 1 1 1 I O interrupt 1 I O interrupt 22 UO interrupt 4 1 Interrupt priority When several interrupt conditions occur simultaneously the programs will be executed in the order of priority shown in the following table the lower the numerical value the higher the level of priority Also if other interrupt conditions occur during an interrupt program execution the interrupt conditions will be put on hold and after the interrupt program execution is completed they will be executed in priority order 1 02 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS 3 User Program Execution Control Interrupt program Priority level Priority in class Timer interrupt 0 mp UO interrupt 1 0 initial value UO interrupt 2 1 ditto UO interrupt 3 2 ditto UO interrupt 4 3 ditto UO interrupt 5 4 ditto UO interrupt 6 5 ditto UO interrupt 7 6 ditto UO interrupt 8 7 ditto The timer interrupt has the highest level of priority followed by the UO interrupt programs in order With respect to the level of priority for I O interrupt the I O in
35. Y041 29 C Running in Emer Running Reverse reverse gency forward R015 stop Running in reverse END When Emergency stop R000 is ON the Fault lamp Y030 is put ON When Preparation complete R001 is ON the Preparation complete lamp Y031 is put ON When Operating R003 is ON the Operating lamp Y032 is put ON R017 becomes ON immediately the operation mode R003 or Emergency stop R000 is put ON When Operation complete R014 is ON the Operation complete lamp Y033 is put ON When R017 is on Y033 is reset When R010 R011 or R012 is ON Forward Y040 is put ON This is interlocked by the Running in reverse answerback X01D When R013 or R014 is ON Reverse YO41 is put ON This is interlocked by the Running forward answerback X01C User s manual Functions 47 6 Programming Example PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 4 Programming procedure 48 V series S2T Here the procedures for actually writing this program to the S2T using the programmer T PDS are shown An operational example of T PDS version 2 0 1 Turn the programmer power ON startup the T PDS by keying in TPDS Enter T PDS initial Menu Screen Wen T PHS SHINE MENT mes Mis stem Bufarnat on T Program 0 Data Monitar L M u s P M E Comments
36. li 11q uu eui sexe 3914 p P si g ueuM el Aq p leolpul spiom jo Jaquinu eui Ag ssejppe moj 1uBu eui 0 11 Sylus pue g Aq pepeeu ejqei p om w eui Sept 19 siBaJ e s g ueuM 8 u uns v F 1uBu HyS sq u lil 1iq tu dz HUS sri aun uonno xg sda s Jo JOQUINN Ayewwwns uolyejussaiday aweN ON NI dnoio suononuisu uonoun suomnonuisu urej6erq 4 ppE 1 274 V series S2T 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 66 Esc nsa eui o Buipuoooe seDueuo Bey Aueo eu DEU Aueo ay Buipnjour uonoeuip 897 Wu y 0 4q y ul ejep eui sejejoy 1088 Aug UNA ufu 38401 yq v8 uSc c 9 0 1192 eui o Buip1o99e sabueyo Bey Kueo eu y Aq peuroeds sq yo Jequinu eui Aq uonoeuip ASIN uei eui oi 1 SejejoJ pue g Aq pepeeu siiq w jo lil 114 eui sexer 3914 p P 51 g ueuM v Aq payloads spiom jo jequinu ayy Aq uonoeurp sseappe uiu ye eui 0 1 s ye o pue g Aq pepeeu spJoM w jo e qe1 eui S YEL 19 siBaJ e s g ueuM a u 1181 v V l lelo1 Sg u li liq uu 8 uSc c 9 0 gey nsa eui o Buip1o99e sebueyo Bey Aureos ay y Aq peuroeds sliq jo s qulnu ayy q uonoeuip gs1 1u8u ay 0 1 sayeyou pue g Aq pepeeu siiq w JO lik 4q eui sexer 3914 p E 51 g ueuM v Aq payloads spi
37. 111 191 121 mu U I3 xB8101 141 1 151 woar 151 Ves 171 vware 181 nomma 191 Db0B1 28 16802 211 DGA83 22 pol 23 Bowes 24 U58061 25 06087 251 171881 27 D71811 28 D7182 231 zulBE ef 18181 301 28182 32 78103 FOE Gu 202 fir Reset TO EEN WE KEEN FI T T3 pi FS FG Fi FE ER Fig The setting method for the latch condition is the same as the arm condition of the sampling trace function See Section 5 9 In the example above 32 devices registers data will be transferred to the latch data storage area when R0100 is changed from OFF to ON The latched data display screen is shown below 1 Latch fata fisplay 1 XEBER o 17 yale Baan 2 xpeel 18 Dam BIR 3 XmpG21 id 19 15881 82368 4 2231 o 28 1 15402 ZEN 5 xardal 21 36883 Seen 6 i X80605 22 1644 papas vpegel 23 16585 23568 8 mur 24 168061 B8655 5 i 14 o 25 152071 841689 18 1 16 26 D71081 38188 11 XBe18 27 07181 8288 i 12 XBBJA 2 28 07182 KI 13 1 XML D 23 781801 I 14 XB01E o m Z81811 15 voir o 21 281821 i 16 vi 33 81362 32 01831 PLAN TEEN sign be Hex uu i Control NEXT T 3 3 This function is useful for program debugging User s manual Functions 11 9 5 RAS Functions PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 8 Debug support function 5 8 1 Force function 5 8 2 Online program chan
38. 2 4 2 Batch I O processing The status of the external input signals will be read from input modules onto the I O register device XW X Output register device YW Y status will be output to the output modules This process takes place before user program execution and is done in batches hence named batch I O processing The object of the batch I O processing is as follows Batch input signals from input modules without i designation on UO allocation and input registers device XW X which are not forced Batch output output registers devices YW Y corresponding to output modules without i designation on I O allocation Also data reading writing between the data transmission module TOSLINE S20 TOSLINE F10 and the link registers relays W Z and LW L will be performed in this process UO register device XW000 Input module XW001 YW002 gt Output module YW003 Link register device Link register allocated T0000 to TOSLINE S20 W0001 Woo CAE TOSLINE S20 W0003 Link relay seele loli VS mer bg Velo E 5 rosin LWOO2 L F L21 L20 woos r s sl User s manual Functions 87 2 Internal Operation PART 2 FUNCTIONS 88 V series S2T Scan If we consider S2T operation simply from the viewpoint of external signal exchanges batch UO processing and user program execution can be considered to be repeated continuously as shown in th
39. 32 V series S2T A group of instructions for executing control is called a user program This is also called an application program a sequence program or a logic circuit In this manual it will be called a user program The memory area which stores the user program is called the user program memory and in the S2T it has a capacity of 32k steps PU662T 64k steps PU672T However out of this 0 5k steps are used to store the user program ancillary information this is called system information Therefore the actual user program capacity will be 31 5k 63 5k steps Also if Tags and Comments are stored in the S2T a part of this area is used A step is the minimum unit which composes an instruction and depending on the type of instruction there will be 1 10 steps per instruction A Flash memory 0 5k steps System information User program 31 5k steps RAM memory 63 5k steps ES Tag and comment r MOIE VAV 1 For the conditions for transfer from the flash memory to the RAM the Initial Load see Section 2 3 2 Tag and Comment are explained in Part 3 PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 4 User Program 4 2 System information System information is the area which stores execution control parameters and user program control information for executing the user program and occupies 0 5k steps The following contents are included in the system information 1 Machine p
40. A list of ladder diagram instructions is shown in Section 5 5 For the detailed specifications of each instruction see the separate volume Instruction set Manual User s manual Functions 21 3 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Instruction execution sequence 21 4 V series S2T The instructions execution sequence in a block composed by ladder diagram are shown below 1 They are executed in the sequence rung rung2 rung3 through to the final rung in the block in the case of a block with an END instruction through to the rung with the END instruction 2 They are executed according to the following rules in any one rung N When there is no vertical connection they are executed from left to right Q When there is an OR connection 2 4 6 Ze the OR logic portion is executed 3 Zal first When there is a branch they are 3 4 A executed in the order from the 6 7 upper line to the lower line ______ A combination of Y and above The instructions execution sequence in which function instructions are included also follows the above rules However for program execution control instructions this will depend on the specification of each instruction The following show the execution sequences in cases in which program execution control instructions are used e Master Control MCS MCR MCSn MCRn 3 M
41. ASCII BCD 7 segment other Floating point operations Execution speed 0 1 us contact 0 2 us coil 0 54 us transfer 0 9 us addition Scanning system Multitasking I O device register Floating scan constant scan interval 10 200 msec 10 msec units 1 main program 4 sub programs 1 timer interrupt 1 1000 msec 1 msec units 8 I O interrupt 8192 points 512 words X Y XW YW batch I O I O IW OW direct I O Auxiliary device register 16000 points 1000 words R RW Special device register 14096 points 256 words S SW Timer device register 1000 points T T proportion of 0 1s and 0 01s timer is user definable User Counter device register 512 points C C data Data register Link device register 8192 words D 16000 points 2048 words Z W for TOSLINE S20 Battery level I O bus check I O response I O registration I O Debugging parity Watch dog timer illegal instruction LP check others RAS Monitoring Event history record scantime measurement others Online trace monitor force sampling trace status latch single Step N scan execution break point others PART 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Internal Operation 2 1 Basic internal The S2T basic operation flow chart is shown below operation flow Power on System initialization HALT mode RUN mode Y Y Peripheral Self Scan control support diagnosis S2T perfor
42. Functions 187 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Example 3 Substituting the result of an operation in an index register Rw200 30 gt 1 Substitute the result of subtracting 30 from RW200 in l xwoo4 ENC 4 J Substitute the uppermost ON bit position of XW004 in J encode NOTE VAV Although basically index registers are processed as single length 16 bits when for instance using an index register as the storage destination for a instruction which becomes double length as the result of a multiplication instruction or the like only the combinations Je lor K e J are effective n this case it becomes J e by designating in the double length operand position and J becomes upper while becomes lower n the same by designating J it becomes K e J and K becomes upper while J becomes lower Example D1357 10 gt J e The following are examples of registers in which index modification has been executed E When expresses RW100 RW 100 VVhen l 1 expresses RVV101 When 1 expresses RW099 When 100 expresses RW200 When 2 100 expresses RWO000 diaz When J 0 expresses D0201 D0200 D0201 D0200 When J 1 expresses D0202 D0201 When J 2 expresses D0203 D0202 When J 1 expresses D0200 D0199 When J 2 expresses D0199 D0198 1 88 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data The following sho
43. HOLD RUN Command HOLD Cancel mode before RUN F HOLD RUN F mode transition conditions Previous state OP mode OP mode transition factor after Note OP mode RAM ROM Mode SW transition RAM RUN Command Force Run INZ HALT RUN F ROM RUN Command Force Run IL INZ RUN or Return to HOLD g RUN Command HOLD Cancel mode before RUN F HOLD HOLD mode transition conditions Previous state OP mode OP mode transition factor after Note OP mode RAM ROM Mode SW transition RUN RUN Command HOLD RUN F RUN Command HOLD HOLD D RUN z RUN Command HOLD 80 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Internal Operation e DEBUG mode transition conditions Previous state OP mode OP mode transition factor after Note OP mode RAM ROM Mode SW transition HALT RUN Command Debug D HALT D STOP RUN Command D HALT Command Initial Command Continue D HALT ES RUN INZ Command Step Command Rung Command Initial D RUN INZ Command Continue D STOP LI RUN Command Step Command Rung HOLD RUN Command HOLD Cancel N scan complete Break point detected Stop condition fulfilled D RUN RUN D STOP Step execution completed Rung execution completed Command Stop Mode SW HALT D HALT RUN Command HALT Mode SW HALT HALT D STOP EF RUN Command HALT D RUN gt RUN
44. This information can be registered monitored on the interrupt assignment screen of the programmer 15 Network Assignment Information Information on the link register areas allocated to the data transmission modules TOSLINE S20 TOSLINE F10 is stored here This information can be registered monitored on the network assignment information screen of the programmer User s manual Functions 141 2 User Program Configuration PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 2 3 User program 1 42 V series S2T The user program is composed of each of the program types of main program sub programs 1 4 interrupt programs Timer I O 1 I O 8 and sub routines Of these program types a main program must always be present However the other program types may not be present at all if they are not used Therefore needless to say a user program can be configured with a main program only Also in the program types the program can be divided into units called blocks block division is not necessary unless required Block 777 is required in the follovving cases VVhen using languages other than ladder diagram 1 language block When creating multiple SFC programs 1 SFC block see Section 5 3 When block division by control function units makes the program easier to see There are no restrictions on program capacities number of steps by program types and blocks Except in the case of SFC As block numbers 1 to 256 are available
45. ae S System Information T Load Save Compare P Program D Setup ptimus M Mata Monitor L AL C Comments X Password I Documentation Q Quit b Usage Map When the communication of the T PDS with the S2T is correctly connected PLC HALT message will be displayed at the bottom left of the screen Although the record of settings is not always required here select Y Yes Now the T PDS has been changed to the online mode User s manual Functions 63 6 Programming Example PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 7 Next clear the memory of the S2T Select S System Information Key in S Frogram Bara Monitor Coments Docwsentatios c Usage i i 1 i 1 I i 1 i i 1 i I i System Information 1 0 Allocation 7 Event History Scan Tine Sampling Trace Status Latch System Diagnosis Memory Management T PIS MODE asten Paraneters Here select M Memory Management from the lt System Information gt menu s AGE P Program H Data Monitor i n 1 u Dsage Map Comments Decosentatian lt System Information lt Nemory Manngrmtnt F System Parameters E A 1 0 Allocation 4 Clear Memory E Event History 1 E Clear Force 1 S Scan Timr A Program Read T Sampling Trace RAM IC card EEPEIM L Status Latch M Program Wri
46. breakpoint setting etc In this mode there are three sub modes D HALT D STOP and D RUN For the DEBUG mode functions see Section 5 11 3 When an error is detected in one of the diagnostic checks and operation cannot be resumed by the prescribed retry action S2T will enter this mode In the ERROR mode the output is completely OFF only the error reset command is effective from the programmer the error reset command takes S2T back to the HALT mode Refer to 5 RAS Functions for detailed diagnosis User s manual Functions 79 2 Internal Operation PART 2 FUNCTIONS The transition conditions for each mode are shown below HALT mode transition conditions Previous state OP mode OP mode transition factor after Note OP mode RAM ROM Mode SW transition RAM F Power on INZ Power off ROM HALT Power on IL INZ ERROR gt Command Error Reset HALT Other than RUN Mode SW HALT above Command HALT RUN mode transition conditions Previous state OP mode OP mode transition factor after Note OP mode RAM ROM Mode SW transition ROM RUN Power on IL INZ Power off RUN Power on HOT restart RANA HALT Mode SW RUN RUN INZ RUN Command RUN INZ HALT HALT Mode SW RUN IL INZ ROM RUN Command RUN IL INZ RUN or Return to
47. flash ERROR mode is entered memory is checked by BCC RTC LSI The validity of the data read Alarm Until reset the date check from the RTC LSI date and and time data in the special time is checked The data register are HFF is set in the special register Battery check The voltage of the memory Alarm f the user program backup battery is checked memory BCC is normal it will start up normally However user data in the retentive memory specification is not guaranteed 2 RUN start up diagnosis Items Diagnostics details Behavior when error detected UO verify check The I O allocation information Error registration error down and the I O modules mounted However when start up is are verified to check that they activated by a command from the agree programmer a message will the displayed t remains in HALT mode and no error registration will take place bus check Checks that I O bus is normal Error registration error down However when start up is activated by a command from the programmer a message will be displayed lt remain in HALT mode and no error registration will take place Expansion unit Checks that power of Error registration error down power check expansion units is normal However when start up is activated by a command from the programmer it will remain the in HALT mode and no error registration will take place I O response Che
48. gt RW register 0 HOS 0 to 999 1 to 256 None O D register 0 HOA Oto 8191 1 to 256 None F register 0 H05 0 to 32767 1 to 256 None Expanded F register 1to 15 HO5 0to8191 1 to 256 None 10r2 H06 1 0to 65535 bank 1 7 1 to 256 None 0 to 57343 bank 8 S20 scan memory 10r2 H10 1 0to 1023 1 to 256 Yes S20LP scan memory 10r2 H10 0 to 4095 1 to 256 None EEPROM D register 0 H20 Oto 8191 Source read None 1 to 256 Destination write 1 to 128 1 Two format types of the expand memory is available They are 8 k words bank type H05 and 64 k words bank type H06 Type 06 is available only in the S2T 2 The status flag is created only when S20 is designated as transfer source 254 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programm ing Language CPU register lt gt Expanded F register configuration Expanded F register Example R0000 lt Type H05 gt F0000 F8191 F0000 F8191 F0000 F8191 Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3 F0000 Bank 15 F8191 1 F Ru000 XFER RW002 RWO10 Source designation RW000 RW001 D0000 CPU register H00 H04 00000 Remark Transfer size RW002 00045 45 words transfer Type H06 gt F00000 Bank 1 F65535 F00000 Bank 8 F57343 Destination designation RVVO10 H01 H05 RWO011 00000 Bank 1 F0000 Expanded F register When R0000 is ON 45 word
49. make 1 instruction by using the table transfer instruction as follows H D1000 TMOV 3 D2000 pe Or sandwich these instructions by DI and El instructions 4 If the same index register is used in different program types the data of the index register should be saved and restored as follows Example Sub program may be interrupted here ER H RW030 MOV 1 H D1000 MOV Rwoso Main program 1 Er MOV D8000 Saving 1 n 1 D8000 MOV for sub program n E END Restoring 1 Interrupt program 1 HI Mov D8010 Saving I n 1 D8010 MOV I for sub program Restoring 1 n IRET With respect to the main program the data of index registers are saved when interrupt occurs and restored when operation returns to main program automatically However because of this even if an index register is used only in an interrupt program the data continuity of the index register between interrupt intervals is not kept In such case use another register to store index value substitute the value into an index register in the interrupt program 234 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 5 5 Network support function 5 5 1 Expand memory card The expanded file register data stored in the backuped memory can be data access through read written through RS 485 computer link computer link There are two types of data storage fo
50. series Computer Link Operation Manual User s manual Functions 237 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 5 2 TOSLINE S20LP loop support 238 V series S2T In addition to th standard bus connection type TOSLINE S20 here called S20 the optical loop connection type TOSLINE S20LP here called S20LP can be used with the S2T SN627 S2T station module of S20LP By using the S20LP high speed control data linkage is available as same as the S20 Furthermore peer to peer communication between S2T s becomes available via S20LP Up to two S20LP can be installed on a S2T S20LP and S20 total e The S20LP has 4 k words of scan transmission capacity The leading 2 k words of the scan memory can be assigned to S2T s link register W And the following 2 k words can be read written by using XFER instruction e The S20LP does not have the scan healthy map Therefore SW128 to SW255 are not used for the S20LP The S20LP has the loop map which indicates loop connection status of each station This loop map can be read by using READ instruction By using SEND and RECV instructions any register data of a S2T can be sent to other S2T and any register data of other S2T can be read into a S2T via S20LP peer to peer communication NOTE VAV 1 The S20LP is under development 2 For details of the S20LP refer to the separate manual for S20LP PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATIO
51. 0 F C B 8 7 0 A MID CH Target station No A MID CH 0 fixed A 1 0 fixed A 1 Request command A 2 Transfer size A 2 Transfer size A 3 Register type self station Register type self station A 4 Leading address self station A244 Leading address self station A 5 Register type target station A 5 Register type target station A 6 Leading address target station A 6 Leading address target station A 7 Response time limit A 7 Response time limit A 8 Target station IP address A 9 A 10 Target station UDP port No NOTE VAV Parameters for the Ethernet varies depending on the request command Above figure shows the parameters for the register read write command H0021 User s manual Functions 263 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION F E D C B 8 7 0 B Abn Busy Status 0 TermSTS B1 Transmission error information if TermSTS is HOB Inside the parameter Transfer parameter S20LP Ethernet MID network type 2 3 CH channel of self station 1or2 1to4 max two S20LP s on S2T max four EN611 EN631 s on S2T Target station No 1 to 64 0 fixed Request command 0 fixed H0021 Register read write Transfer size 1 to 128 1 to 485 number of words max 84 words for T or C register max 323 words for T or C register designation across T511 and T512 is designation across T511 and T512 not allowed is not allowed Register type H0000 XW
52. 131 141 166 Sampling race T n llori aad Eege 119 131 136 141 SCanicontro lava ep ad casco MER Eege 75 81 86 203 Scan Cycle Men E RON 26 89 90 91 95 100 104 124 130 138 143 170 Secan modez ENEE 81 86 88 89 91 98 143 Scan time Setting trois io reae rtp ort he tte EXPE but po guae dub aet ede on dened 143 Special register SW utr e as v ur EE Dude ds 161 Status latch function oe trt Pt tere en e E PE e Ee ds 136 Sub program execution time ENEE 107 130 143 SUD DIO Musical ca ari ENEE EE 38 41 89 104 105 106 107 108 111 128 130 138 143 146 148 149 155 165 167 181 183 223 224 297 Index elle del 5 o ado e de code e e eet System comments sss System configuration System information uoo t iir rt e p e T Timer interrupt interval Tire te pcs soa coe deo Ere Po OE Timer register T Timer UPO Ate iii Timing rel ay PC U Unit base address setting function Unsigned double length integer Unsigned Mi e EEN User data initialization_ y Eege User program check User program execution User program memoyy 298 231 23
53. 28 bits started with the designated device the subject of data operation Q8 makes 8 digits 32 bits started with the designated device the subject of data operation In digit designation when the area designated covers multiple registers as shown below the area is designated from the smaller address to the greater address User s manual Functions 191 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 1 92 V series S2T Example RWO31 RWO30 al FB 0 FC 0 R0300 Ill The 16 bits RO30C to RO31B RO30C is the LSB as a numerical value Below the operation of digit designation is described for the case when digit designation is executed as a source operand a register for executing an instruction using its data and the case when digit designation is executed as a destination operand a register which stores the result of instruction execution Itis possible to carry out digit designation for both a source operand and a destination operand with 1 instruction 1 Digit designation for a source operand For a single length 16 bits operand Q0 to Q4 are available The upper digits which are out of the designated digits are regarded as O Example 1 Q1 l X0054 MOV D1000 E Data transfer F C B 8 7 43210 Transferred data Contents of X0057 Contents of X0056 Contents of X0055 Contents of X0054 Example 2 Q4 xoo2c B H0050 gt Ywoto BCD addition Example of XVV003 H8765 XW002
54. 3 dz z jndui uornoejes umop dn au JO le s eui o Sulpio22E 5 uwop dn ett opeuu si uonoeuJip junoo ay JO uonoejes ay Y 161 jejunoo eui l 11 saJo s oann pue NO 4100 sey indu junoo ay Seu jo jequinu ay sjunoo uononiisul eui NO S 3 indu ejqeue y y Aold sexe 1eseH 44O 01 y eoi ep eui sjesal Mu L8 e Y NO S H Indu esas ay ueuw NO 0 v eai ep DJAS 00 91 1 eui sies uononujsut eui NO S S Indu Jes ay UM 1 Aq g Jo enjeA eui sjueujejoep os V 891 9 9 O u y sesos pue sun u peusnd sem uoruw erep o 8 u adOd v E 1511 dod 221 eui y Aq pepeeu sp1ow u 10 lQE ay WO no sexe 1 Aq g yo enjeA eui 51 vol 9 9 os y O ul y see pue y Aq pepeeu spiom o 8 u 1dOd V 1se dog 921 u JO lQE y 0 se ui peusnd ejep ay no seye 1 Aq g Jo anjea eui sjueujeJour pue 2 Aq 891 iH eiep o a u usna v 921 LI ul suaysibes Buiyoyew ay sseuppe Jose ee E 1S AO ay sajo s pue D ui seyajeu Jo Jequunu uL e 9 ec 9 8 ay seJolS Y 10 siuejuoo eui Bulyoyew EIER 104 40 a u HOS v des Hees EER Pat Buisseooud a Aq pepeau spJow u jo lqE eiep yBnoxy seuo1ees ejep eroeds sn ou sd ls uonejueseJdeH N dnoio JO JOqUINN Nr
55. BE 1 i at 3 1 3 E 8I H 3I 1 ia E 1 ia 18 I 1 User s manual Functions 51 6 Programming Example PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 52 V series S2T In offline programming manual I O allocation is carried out Therefore select F1 Edit on the command line A cursor will appear on the screen iY 5 1XsY 7 2 E SF HK F 32W 6 64m 128 mit m nit 1 Unit 82 mit 82 Slot 1 0 Slat I Slat L Sint 1 0 P VI at I BL 1 a af 1 1 il 1 l 1 1 1 2 1 z l I z 1 2 1 3 I 31 1 3 I 3 I 41 41 4 1 41 5 5 1 1 5 1 5 1 1 si 1 bi 1 6 I 5 i i 1d 1 7 I 1 7 i 1 7i 1 8I ef 8 I ef 8 I 1 3 1 s I 18 1 18 ia E 1 Enter nodule typa ami register size TA Because the module configuration has been decided in Section 6 2 carry out the following settings as the input output allocation Unit 0 Slot VO PU 0 X 2W DI634 32 pts input 1 Y 2W 1 DO634 32 pts output 2 Y 1W RO663 16 pts output To set the module type move the cursor to the specified slot position Then designate by combining a function division X Y etc and the number of the register occupied 1W 2W etc from the selection list displayed in the upper part of the screen First move the cursor to Unit 0 Slot 0 using the cursor keys Then key in 1 to designate
56. H Bacmmentntian H Usage Pece ive Cng ol Load Save Compare Setnp Options Dnline ffline Password Quit NAAA FI F2 F F TS Fb 17 Ty Fo F8 In the initial state the T PDS starts up in the communication mode with the PLC S2T Therefore in the state when it is not connected to the S2T Receive time out is displayed on the screen 2 In order to carry out off line programming change to off line mode Select L Online Offline key in L System InForsation Program Comments Documentation 5 P M E B D Select note Current mode is Online N Online F TE Usage Map T D Data Monitor L D H Load Save Compare Setup Options Password Quit PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 Programming Example Here select F Offline Key in F r O kO men 7 PUS MORE SEM ama 4 System Information T Load Save Compare P Program H Setup Options 8 Data Monitor L EA C Comments M Password D Decumentation A Quit U Usage Map Select drive for Verkl A Drive A B Drive E D Drive D E Drive E This sets the selection mode for the disk drive in which to create the off line work file Here select C drive C by keying in C 5 System information T Losd Save Lompare P Program D Setup Options u M Bara Monttar L APRA DET i Comments Password f 1 Pocomentation Q
57. HALT Power ON HALT No Initial Load RAM Auto RUN RUN RUN Power ON No Initial Load Standby HALT Power OFF HALT Power ON HALT Initial Load execution ROM Auto RUN RUN Power ON RUN Initial Load execution RUN Standby Y Error detection at power ON ERROR HALT Mode SW RUN RUN RAM RUN Command RUN RUN No Initial Load Command Force RUN RUN F HALT Mode SW RUN RUN Initial Load execution RUN ROM Command RUN RUN HALT RUN Command Force RUN RUN F Initial Load execution gt RUN F RUN Mode SW HALT HALT Mode unchange HALT Command any HALT Command invalid Mode unchange RUN Command HALT HALT Error detection ERROR RUN Mode SW HALT HALT Command HALT HALT RUN Command RUN RUN aes RUN Command invalid Mode unchange Command Force RUN RUN Error detection ERROR RUN Mode SW HALT HALT Command HALT HALT RUN F x Command RUN RUN F mE RUN Command invalid Mode unchange Command Force RUN RUN F Error detection ERROR Mode SW HALT RUN ERROR edens nvali ERROR Command except Error Reset ERROR Command Error Reset HALT Recovery to HALT mode 1 In this table OP mode RAM ROM and Mode SW mean Operation mode RAM ROM switch and Operation Mode switch respectively 2 means the switch status is not related to 3 See next page for the Initial Load User s manual Functions 21 2 Operation Outline 2 3 Operation flow chart PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING User programs can be produced
58. However the block numbers need not be consecutive When executing the program the program is executed in sequence from the block with the lowest number PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 2 User Program Configuration 2 3 1 Main program The main program is the portion which is the core of the user program and is always executed every scan The main program must be finished by the END instruction Although instructions may be present after the END instruction these portions will not be executed However they count in the number of steps used Example of Main Program Configuration Block 1 1 H 4 HH Ladder diagram block 800 HH H Oo E Block 10 SFC block E Block 11 SFC block m Block 20 F 5 Ladder diagram block 5 User s manual Functions 143 2 User Program Configuration PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 2 3 2 Sub program 1 44 V series S2T The sub program is a program type to achieve the multi tasking function 4 sub programs Sub 1 Sub 4 are provided Sub 1 is executed once in the first scan before the main program execution Therefore the Sub 1 can be used for the initial setting program Sub 2 can be selected from the two functions the initial setting program in the case of power interruption and the normal sub program function which can be controlled by other program types Sub 3 and Sub 4 are fixed as the norm
59. I O module will be performed based on the I O allocation information Data exchange with the data transmission module TOSLINE S20 TOSLINE F10 will be also performed The first scan is input only Batch l O processing is explained in 2 4 2 Timer update The activated timer registers and the timing relays S0040 0047 will be updated Timer update is explained in 2 4 3 User program execution User program instructions will be executed in sequence from the beginning to the END instruction The execution object is a main program and sub programs In case of an interrupt program when the interrupt is generated the corresponding interrupt program is activated immediately The user program execution control is explained in detail in section 3 Mode control Will check the Operation mode switch and for mode change commands from the programmer and change the operation mode Also scan timing control will be performed by measuring the scan cycle In the S2T the scan mode enables select from floating scan and constant scan The floating scan mode is that immediately after one scan is complete the next scan commences It is the shortest scan cycle but the scan cycle varies according to the user program execution state The action of the floating scan is shown in the following diagram Scan cycle Scan cycle b 1 Mode lO Timer User program Mode I O Timer User program
60. J 1 0000 0001 0 0000 0000 User s manual Functions 185 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 1 86 V series S2T 7 Floating Point Data This is a real number which is expressed using 2 consecutive registers 32 bit The registers are designated in the form A 1 7 Internally the following format is used conforms to IEEE754 MSB LSB F E 7 6 0 F 0 lt Bit positions Exponent Mantissa 23 bits 8 bits Sign 0 1 Register 2 1 Register Value Sign 1 Mantissa x 2 Exponent 127 The floating point data is used with the following floating point instructions Therefore there is no need for user to consider the format Conversions Floating point Double length integer Floating point arithmetics Floating point comparisons Floating point functions Trigonometrics square root etc Floating point process operations Integral PID etc The following table shows the numerical range in which the floating point data can be processed Numerical value Expression Remarks 3 40282 x 10 3 40282E38 Maximum J J 1 17549 x 1058 1 17549E 38 Nearest to 0 0 0 1 17549 x 1022 1 17549E 38 Nearest to 0 J 40282 x 1022 3 40282E38 Minimum PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data 3 4 Index modification When registers are used by instructions the method of dire
61. O in the SW register and in the order SW197 W1104 W1119 SW198 W1120 W1135 SVV199 VV1136 W1151 SW200 W1152 W1167 SVV201 VV1168 W1183 SVV202 VV1184 VV1199 SW203 W1200 W1215 SW204 W1216 W1231 SW205 W1232 W1247 SW206 W1248 W1263 SW207 TOSLINE S20 VV1264 W1279 sw208 Scan healthy map VV1280 W1295 SW209 W1296 W1311 SVV210 VV1312 VV1327 SVV211 VV1328 W1343 SW212 W1344 W1359 SW213 VV1360 W1375 SVV214 VV1376 W1391 SW215 VV1392 W1407 SW216 W1408 W1423 SW217 VV1424 W1439 SW218 VV1440 W1455 SW219 VV1456 W1471 SW220 VV1472 W1487 SVV221 VV1488 VV1503 SW222 W1504 W1519 SW223 W1520 W1535 NOTE VAV In case of TOSLINE S20LP it does not have the scan healthy map Therefore these SW registers are not effective for the TOSLINE S20LP 1 78 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data dade Name Function SVV224 VV1536 VV1551 e The corresponding bit is ON when the VV SVV225 VV1552 VV1567 register is updated normally SVV226 VV1568 VV1583 SVV227 VV1584 VV1599 e The lowest address of W register corresponds SVV228 VV1600 VV1615 to bit 0 in the SVV register and in the order SW229 W1616 W1631 SW230 W1632 W1647 SW231 W1648 W1663 SW232 W1664
62. PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language Function Blocks These are expressed as boxes which each show 1 function As types of function there are data transfers the four arithmetic operations logic operations comparisons and various mathematical functions Each of these is called an instruction Function instructions In a function block there are 1 or more inputs and 1 output When a certain condition is satisfied by the input state a specified function is executed and the ON OFF of the output is determined by the result of execution Example 1 Addition Input 4 8 O H Output When the input is ON the content of register y and the content of register B are added and the result is stored in register The output becomes ON if an overflow or an underflow is generated as the result of the addition Example 2 Combination of Relay Symbols and Function Blocks X0030 Y0105 y M 4 XW004 gt 500 X0105 X0027 When X0030 is ON or the content of XW004 exceeds 500 Y0105 becomes ON Y0105 stays on even if X0030 is OFF and the content of XVV004 is 500 or less then Y0105 will become OFF when X0027 becomes ON NOTE VAV 1 A function block can be regarded as a contact which has a special function By carefully arranging the function blocks in the order of execution of instructions complex control functions can be achieved by an easily understandable program 2
63. PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Processable numerical range and expression format are shown in the following Table Numerical Value Binary Expression Hexadecimal Decimal Expression 32767 0111 1111 1111 1111 TFFF 32766 0111 1111 1111 1110 TFFE J J 1 0000 0000 0000 0001 0001 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 1 1111 1111 1111 1111 FFFF J J 32767 1000 0000 0000 0001 8001 32768 1000 0000 0000 0000 8000 The 2 s complement is that the lower 16 bits become all 0 by adding the 2 s complement data and the original data Example 0111 1111 1111 1111 A Binary 32767 1000 0000 0000 0001 Binary 32767 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 In calculation the 2 s complements of a numerical value can be found by the operation of inverting each bit of that numerical value and adding 1 Example 0111 1111 1111 1111 Binary 32767 bit inversion 1000 0000 0000 0000 Binary 32768 add 1 1000 0000 0000 0001 Binary 32767 3 BCD BCD is the abbreviation of Binary Coded Decimal BCD expresses 1 digit 0 9 of a decimal number by 4 bits of a binary number Therefore 1 register can express the numerical value of a 4 digit decimal number MSB LSB FEDCBA 9 87654232 1 0 Bit positions Register IAS 105 102 101 102 1 82 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data Processable numerical
64. RAM At system initialization RAM ROM switch is in ROM At transition to RUN mode RAM ROM switch is in ROM Mode switch is in RUN Read write the data registers in flash memory Reads the data of data registers in flash memory and stores in the main memory by user program Writes the specified data of the main memory into the data registers in flash memory by user program Accessed by Expanded data transfer instruction XFER MOIE VAV respect to the initial load function 1 Refer to 2 2 System Initialization and 2 4 Scan Control with 2 The number of times the flash memory can be written will be limited by the hardware to 100 000 times number of times the flash memory write is performed The S2T counts the If the 100 000 times is exceeded the flash memory alarm flag 80007 will come ON However this checking is not effective for data writing by XFER instruction It is recommended to check it by user program for the XFER instruction 1 04 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS 4 Peripheral Memory Support Functions 4 2 Expansion memory Expansion memory can be used as user data expansion area support expanded file register The following functions are available with the expansion memory card Use type Function Details Conditions Expansion Sampling trace Stores trace data when Used with the sampling memory buffer the sampling trace is trace functi
65. S0417 Sub program 4 delay Warning ON when sub program 4 execution delay cyclic mode 0418 0419 S041A S041B BMG Reserve for future use S041D S041E S041F User s manual Functions 169 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION nin Name Function SW042 Sub program 2 interval Number of scans for sub program 2 cyclic mode SW043 Sub program 3 interval Number of scans for sub program 3 cyclic mode SW044 Sub program 4 interval Number of scans for sub program 4 cyclic mode SW045 Reserve for future use 1 70 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data Special device Name Function SW046 SW052 Reserve for future use Special register Name Function SW067 Write protect for SEND RECV Used for setting write protect against SEND and RECV instructions User s manual Functions 171 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 7 Name Function S0780 Transmission status ON during transmission S0781 Output inhibit status ON vvhen output inhibit mode S0782 Re configuration ON during re configuration S0783 Reserve for future use S0784 Scan transmission error On when scan transmission error occurs S0785 S0786 Reserve for future use S0787 TOSLINE F10 s0788 CH1 command Transmi
66. Stores error flags execution SW Special register control flags clock calendar data 256 words SW000 SW255 timing clocks etc Stores elapsed time during timer instruction execution Stores current count value during counter instruction execution Used for storing control D 1TData register parameters and as a temporary 8192 words D0000 D8191 memory for execution results Data exchange area with data W Link register transmission module 2048 words W0000 W2047 TOSLINE S20 Data exchange area with data LW Link relay register transmission module 256 words LVVO00 LVV255 TOSLINE F10 Used for storing control T Timer register 1000 words T000 T999 C Counter register 512 words C000 C511 F 1 File register parameters and for storing 32768 words F0000 F32767 accumulated data l Used for indirect addressing for 1 word No address J Index register register designation of 1 word J No address instructions 1word K No address 1 In the S2T system 1 word is treated as equal to 16 bits and units called words are used as numbers of registers 2 All register addresses are decimal numbers 3 In the timer register TOOO T063 increase in 0 01 second units 0 01 second timer and T064 T999 increase in 0 1 second units 0 1 second timer User s manual Functions 37 5 User Data PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 38 V series S2T On the other hand
67. TERR 220 221 223 224 226 227 229 231 240 246 250 253 271 Link device 161 Hink register EM sed A 161 219 Link register 161 240 M Main program EREMO EE 41 43 66 89 104 105 107 108 130 138 146 147 148 149 155 223 224 231 235 237 241 242 233 235 268 Manual I O 28 31 33 35 38 60 145 205 209 211 212 Eine ee Le EE 38 141 Mode control eate endi n 22 26 75 80 81 86 89 Mode transition 81 85 Module el A 28 29 34 60 62 145 152 205 207 209 212 213 Multitask f n tl l ceri a EY Mo a 104 295 Index N Network assignment information ENNEN 38 145 o Online program changing 20 138 Operation mode SWITCH saa aaa ao uman nad 18 22 24 28 73 79 80 84 85 88 89 Operation MOS a 20 98 141 248 253 O tp t device icono o co 161 Output register YW a eos un ned vaste 47 161 164 P PLC canitalcomiiaidls eeu bed ei toOto alto tme Domi 22 Password T nction i a dee ER ina 103 151 Peripheral SupBSr Ee 75 81 96 98 Povverintert ptirdecisio
68. Unit 0 Unit 1 S S Module type Register Module type Register t t PU 0 iX Y 2W XW000 YW001 0 1 iX Y 2W XW002 YW003 11X 4W XW016 XW019 2X 2W XW004 XW005 2 4W XW020 XW023 3 X 2W XW006 XW007 3 Y 4W YW024 YW027 4 Y 2W XW008 YW009 4 Y 4W YW028 YW031 5 Y 2W XW010 YW011 5 Vacant 6 Y 2W XW012 YVVO13 6 Vacant 7 iX Y 2W XW014 YWO15 7 Vacant 3 nterrupt program assignment Program type Corresponding input register Corresponding interrupt I O Remarks UO interrupt program 1 XW000 Unit 0 Slot 0 1 Interrupt I O 1 UO interrupt program 2 XW002 Unit 0 Slot 1 Interrupt I O 2 UO interrupt program 3 XW014 Unit 0 Slot 7 Interrupt I O 3 User s manual Functions 147 2 User Program Configuration PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION The interrupt program assignment determined as the page before can be changed as follows Example Interrupt assignment information before changing Interrupt level Interrupt program No Input register No 0 1 XW000 1 2 XW002 2 3 XW014 Change to Interrupt assignment information after changing Interrupt level Interrupt program No Input register No 0 1 XW000 1 2 002 2 3 014 In this example interrupt programs for XVV002 and XW004 are exchanged NOTE VAV By using the interrupt assignment function the correspondence betw
69. V 18 Jo Q opel on LO ole anya v any u6u r lqnoq 6r s H M L lt s aw v anun 9021 y EE o 1 o 8 1 8 3 vv H uolsyup 1urod Suneol i Liz 80 21 y fa UI do mp alo buno eu sa tte 64 48 diir gl uoneordnnuniuod Aus orz 28 pl v uj 000 piel o 1 o 8 1 8 4 w 1 w H uonoeaqns quod upeo 602 vl r e a pue m 400001 o 1 0 g L g 4 vY Lv uonippe Buneo 4 802 alo sn ON aun sd ls Kyeuiung uonejueseJdeH SueN dnoio UOl no9x3 o JSQUINN NA suononuisu uonoun J suononuisu ureJ6eiq Jeppe 272 V series S2T 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION nsa v o Buipioooe U 2Z O S 9 p seDueuo Bey Aug eu g ul nse eui seJois pue mi a u JHS v LT H l wus qu 12 uono uiip GSW YO eur o 5110 u y u erep eui syius nseJ y o Buip oooe U ZOtZ v 9 sebueyo Dei ureo eu q ur inse eui soos pue 8 uurs v Wu wys 1q u 01 897 DU eui 0 9110 u y u erep eui silus ins l y o Buipioooe 89 y e z seDueuo bey Aue eu v l ee eui seo s pue ias M l Mus lq 69 GSW yel 94 ol liq v ur erep eui sillus nsa v o Buipioooe ev z sebueyo Bey Aueo eu y ul Insel ay seJojs pue v L HHS pys yq 89 u
70. W1679 SW233 W1680 W1695 SW234 VV1696 W1711 SW235 W1712 W1727 SW236 W1728 W1743 SW237 VV1744 W1759 SW238 W1760 W1775 SW239 TOSLINE S20 VV1776 W1791 SVV240 scan healthy map W1792 W1807 SW241 W1808 W1823 SW242 W1824 W1839 SW243 W1840 W1855 SW244 W1856 W1871 SW245 W1872 W1887 SW246 W1888 W1903 SW247 W1904 W1919 SW248 W1920 W1935 SW249 W1936 W1951 SW250 W1952 W1967 SW251 W1968 W1983 SW252 W1984 W1999 SW253 W2000 W2015 SW254 W2016 W2031 SW255 W2032 W2047 NOTE VAV In case of TOSLINE S20LP it does not have the scan healthy map Therefore these SW registers are not effective for the TOSLINE S20LP User s manual Functions 179 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 3 Register data types 1 80 V series S2T It has already been explained the register is a location which stores 16 bits of data In the S2T instructions the following types of data can be processed using single registers or multiple consecutive registers Unsigned integers integers in the range 0 to 65535 Integers integers in the range 32768 to 32767 BCD integers in the range 0 to 9999 expressed by BCD code Unsigned double length integers integers in the range 0 to 4294967295 Double length integers integers in the range 2147483648 to 2147483647 Double length BCD integers in the range 0 to 99999999 expressed by BCD code
71. W1984 W2047 32 LINK 0960 1023 User s manual Functions 205 4 VO Allocation PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 206 V series S2T When GLOBAL setting is used the link registers of GLOBAL setting block are assigned to both CH1 and CH2 S20 s S2T s link register Block Setting CH1 S20 CH2 S20 W CH1 CH2 scan memory scan memory W0192 W0255 4 LINK 0192 0255 W0256 W0319 5 GLOBAL 0256 0319 0256 0319 W0320 W0383 6 GLOBAL 0320 0383 0320 0383 W0384 W0447 7 GLOBAL 0384 0447 0384 0447 W0448 W0511 8 GLOBAL 0448 0511 0448 0511 VV0512 W0575 9 LINK 0512 0575 xS W1216 W1279 20 LINK 0192 0255 W1280 W1343 21 W1344 W1407 22 VV1408 VV1471 23 VV1472 VV1535 24 VV1536 VV1599 25 LINK 0512 0575 In case of TOSLINE S20LP it has 4096 words of scan memory The leading 2048 words can be assigned straight to W register The following 2048 words can be accessed by using XFER instruction The blocks 1 16 are dedicated to the CHI S20 and the blocks 17 32 are dedicated to the CH2 S20 It is not allowed to assign the blocks 1 16 to CH2 and blocks 17 32 to CH1 For the blocks set as LINK or GLOBAL the S2T performs data read from S20 for data receive area and data write to S20 for data send area The data transfer direction read or write is automatically decided by the S
72. When input has been completed as far as the 4th rung write the 151 to 4th rungs into the work file In other words the size of program which is writable to the work file at any one time is one screen size 11 lines by 12 columns Therefore this means writing to the work file at convenient divisions of rungs The cursor also will move within the screen limits in the Edit mode Carry out the operation of writing to the work file as follows State with input up to the 4th rung complete Y09010 Paan EIB TUN ESRO 48811 l RARBG ROBO PANES X29818 1 PA A 8613 B DR 8816 RENAA reg A E 8012 ROO 9814 mu Gw mme SE User s manual Functions 59 6 Programming Example PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING Key in Shift F6 Write B B18 TUN op D H IN A kaa ian pen ba ROBE X98819 mme FE 34 394 31 k usi X8813 20002 20816 Geen T LI 18812 1 RARIS RAPA RARAJ TARAI 1 4 Ek 4 s v yed N No ffTinr Block I DI ZALI EH Cancel x 18018 Rame i O PBG XES11 RW RYE Fee 10 7908 q _ _ gt y HAN RAMS 20 6 Runs GR t mea KR Fil 0812 2 Em TR F863 H j Y In this way the 1st to 4th rungs have been written to the work file Next input the 5th rung onward Move the curso
73. YW register H0001 W register H0002 LW register H0003 RW register H0004 D register H0005 F register CPU H 05 Expanded F register expand memory 8k words bank is bank No 01 OF H 06 Expanded F register expand memory 64 words bank is bank No 01 02 H0007 T register H0008 C register H0009 SW register Leading address Designates the leading register address to be transferred Response time limit Specifies the time limit of the response from target station 0 1 s units When the bit F is set to ON the following default value is used S20LP 415 Ethernet 305 Target station IP address N A Designates the IP address of the target station Target station UDP port No N A Designates the UDP port No of the target station 264 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language Inside the parameter cont d Status S20LP Ethernet Abn Normal complete Error complete Initial state Transmission port busy Busy Status Initial state While send requesting While waiting response 3 Complete A 10 6 6 TermSTS H00 Normal complete H01 Register designation error H02 Response time out H03 Parameter error H04 Register vvrite protect H05 Reserve H06 Module error send time out H07 No send channel H08 Invalid station No HO9 Transfer size error HOA Boundary error PE HOB Tr
74. and MCR ON only when the input of MCS is ON PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 Programming Example Operation Mode Setting Part 1 Operating Sequence X010 6000 M 10 TON TOG4 1 second delay Emergency stop A Fault reset HO XO p i p Pr dic Emergency Stop Operating LSO eparation stop complete D PE mp np Pog d C H Stop Operating Stop Emergency Stop complete stop R002 X012 R001 R014 R002 R000 R003 MARA HH Start Preparation Operation Stop Emergency complete complete stop r ing R003 R003 sk Operating t XW00 BIND D 5000 Numerical setting device X019 R010 Lt C LS1 Runni foar 1 068 Cycle complete R010 X019 R013 4 10 TON Toes 151 Running in 1 second delay reverse T 065 X01A R011 EN N 2 LS2 un R011 X01A R013 TON T068 LS2 Running in reverse 2 seconds delay When Emergency stop X010 normally ON is OFF maintains 000 ON R000 is reset by Fault reset X011 ON ON delay timer is to wait the establishment of the emergency stop signal When operating F003 is ON and Stop X013 is ON the stop mode R002 is ON When Stop complete R016 is ON R002 is put to reset When Preparation complete R001 is ON and Start X012 is ON the operation mode R003
75. and Sub 4 are fixed in normal mode function In the normal mode the execution mode can be selected from one time execution or cyclic execution No Normal special One time cyclic Operation Executed only once before main Subi N A N A program in the first scan after UO processing One time mode Executed when S0409 1 Normal mode when 3040520 S0409 is reset automatically when S0403 0 1 cyclic mode Executed once every specified Sub 2 when S0405 1 scans SW042 during S0409 1 Executed only once before main Special mode N A program in the first scan instead of when S0403 1 Sub 1 if S0400 1 and the last power off period is less than 2s One time mode Executed when S040A 1 Suus Normal mode when S0406 0 S040A is reset automatically u only Cyclic mode Executed once every specified when S0406 1 scans SW043 during S040A 1 One time mode Executed when S040B 1 bi Normal mode when S0407 0 S0408 is reset automatically u only Cyclic mode Executed once every specified when S0407 1 scans SW044 during S0408 1 Hereafter the main program and sub program 1 to sub program 4 are referred as Main Sub 1 to Sub 4 respectively User s manual Functions 95 3 User Program Execution Control PART 2 FUNCTIONS The flags special relays registers related to the sub program operation are summarized in the table below
76. below User Program Memory Configuration 0 5k steps System information User program 31 5k 63 5k steps Comments System information is the area which stores execution control parameters for the user program and user program management information and it always occupies 0 5k steps Comments are added and stored for easy maintenance of the user program The comments storage area is not fixed user setting The user programs is divided into the program types of main program sub programs interrupt programs and sub routines depending on the function Of these the main program is the core of the user program On the other hand when it is difficult to achieve the requested control functions by the main program alone sub programs and interrupt programs are used as required but need not be provided Also sub routines are used when repetition of the same process in a program is required or in order to see the program more easily by making one function into a block but may not be provided if not required User s manual Functions 137 2 User Program Configuration PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION User Program Configuration Program Type Internal Program Types Configuration Blocks Main program Block 1 Sub program 1 Sub program 2 Sub program 3 b Block 2 Sub program 4 X Timer interrupt program E I O interrupt program 1 Block 3 UO interru
77. can decide the operation re start condition as follows Interruption time Re start condition Method Longer than 2 seconds Within 2 seconds Re start after the normal initialization Re start after the normal initialization Re start after setting the prespecified data into registers devices Do not use the hot restart function S0400 0 Use sub program 2 as special mode to set prespecified data Re start after setting the data according to input status Use sub program 2 as special mode to set data according to input status Re start without any initialization hot restart Do not use sub program 2 special mode MOIE VAV 1 When power interruption is longer than 2 seconds normal initialization will be carried out even if S0400 is ON 2 The hot restart function is also available by using the programmer s System Diagnosis menu in addition to setting S0400 to ON PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 RAS Functions 5 5 Execution status monitoring The following functions are served by the S2T for user to monitor the S2T execution status Refer to separate manuals for the programmer for operation of these 1 Execution time measurement function Measures the following execution times This data can be monitored on the programmer Scan cycle current value maximum value minimum value 1 ms units e Main program execution time current value maximum valu
78. data transmission modules TOSLINE S20 TOSLINE F10 see separate manuals for them User s manual Functions 207 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 1 Overview The S2T supports 2 types of programming language for the user programs ladder diagram and SFC Multiple programming languages can be used in mixed by a single user program by separating blocks of the program Thus the optimum program configuration for the control functions can be achieved 1 Ladder Diagram This is the language which is core programming language for the S2T The program is configured by a combination of relay symbols and function blocks This language is suitable for logic control Relay Symbols These are NO contact NC contact coil etc Function Blocks These are box type instructions which express single functions They can be freely positioned in a ladder diagram network by treating them in a similar way to relay contacts The output of one function block can be connected to the input of another function block Example X05 X10 X13 X14 Y5A HA me Co Y5A X20 R3C H RW12 MOV D102 R100 HXw10 gt D101 208 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language Transition condition 2 SFC Sequential Function Chart This is a programming language suitable for process stepping control sequential control Also it is a language which makes the flow of control easy to see
79. data writing into an address It is 100 000 times Pay attention not to exceed the limit flash memory alarm flag S0007 is not updated by executing this instruction Once data writing into the flash memory is executed flash memory access read write is prohibited for the duration of 10 ms Therefore minimum 10 ms interval is necessary for data writing User s manual Functions 257 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION MOIE VAV e Edge execution modifier is also available for this instruction e The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases ERF 0051 is set to ON Transfer Error cause Between CPU registers When the transfer size is O or more than 256 2 When the source destination table of transfer is out of the valid range CPU register to 1 When the transfer size is 0 or more than 256 expanded F register 2 When the source destination table of transfer is out of the valid range 3 When the PU662T module CPU register to 1 When the transfer size is 0 or more than 256 S20 S20LP 2 When the source destination table of transfer is out of the valid range 3 When channel designation is other than 1 or 2 other than 1 for T2 4 When S20 S20LP is not installed or not allocated 5 When status flag area is not sufficient 6 When an odd address is designated as the leading address in the case of S20 S20LP is set as double word access
80. ege Reserve for future use S000D TOSLINE F10 error Warning ON when TOSLINE F10 error operation continues 5000 TOSLINE S20 error Warning ON when TOSLINE S20 error operation continues SOOOF Battery volatge low Warning ON when battery voltage low operation continues S0010 System ROM error Down ON when system ROM error S0011 System RAM error Down ON when system RAM error S0012 1 Program memory error Down ON when program memory RAM error S0013 EEPROM error Down ON when EEPROM error S0014 Reserve for future use S0015 LP error Down ON when language processor LP error S0016 Main CPU error Down ON when main error Down S0017 0018 0019 S001A BOE Reserve for future use S001C S001D S001E S001F 1 Watch dog timer error Down ON when watch dog timer error occurs 1 This area is for reference only Do not write 2 The error flags are reset at the beginning of RUN mode User s manual Functions 161 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Special device Name Function S0020 1 O bus error Down ON when UO bus error occurs S0021 UO mismatch error Down ON when UO mismatch error occurs allocation information and mounting state do not agree S0022 I O response error Down ON when no l O response occurs S0023 1 O parity error Down ON when UO data parity error occurs S0024 Reserve for future use
81. enables to change the constant operand such as timer counter preset value and constant data used in function instructions online during RUN For the timer counter presets changing is possible even in the memory protect state P RUN NOTE VAV VVhen using the online program changing function pay attention for safety If changed rung contains a transition sensing type instruction below the instruction will be executed at the online changing if the input condition is ON because the input condition of last scan is initialized Pay attention for this point tL Jet lt PH Edged function instructions PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 RAS Functions 5 8 3 DEBUG mode functions DEBUG mode The S2T has a special mode for supporting the program debugging It is the DEBUG mode n the DEBUG mode the following functions become available e Breakpoint setting function Starts and stops at the instruction which is set as the breakpoint Single step execution function Starts and stops in unit of one instruction Single rung execution function Starts and stops in units of one rung e Nscans execution function Executes specified times of scans and stops e Stop condition setting function Executes until the specified stop condition is fulfilled The S2T can enter into the DEBUG mode only from the HALT mode There are three sub modes in the DEBUG mode D HALT D RUN and D STOP D HALT D RUN D STOP
82. epooeq Lal ay sies g Aq pepeeu 510 uz ezis JO iq eui sexe g eieiei 0 62 v e ul uonisod 10 NO 1souu ddn au seJojs uononujsul a u ON3 v H 021 eui v Aq pepeeu Sq uz 9215 Jo lli 10 eui ul 82 L Bey Aueo au sjeseg o1su Ayeo josey 6LL GIE L Bey Aueo eui sies o1as Aseo aS gil 440 0111 s1l8s 1 pue y VLE S Aq p ye lpul uonisod y ur 10 y sexe uononu sul y a u isu v F 1959 y eigen LL g eise eui Aq pepeeu u jo lli 4q ay WO4 NO OLI 9199 pue v Le Gr qpajeo pul uolleool ayy u lq eui sexe uononuisui eui a u 1381 v FE jes iq AALL 911 a 191sI6 1 ay q pepeeu U jo ai iq eui WOJ V 1a siBa ui 0 se1o01s Her 191SIB 1 e s y 11 6 2 v ISH H Josey GLL 629 AAO 01 v sies S9IA D e SI v Jl y 1e1siDeJ u 4444H S910 S Her 191SIB 1 e s y 11 c v 13S JejsiDey eowep 19S YLL 699 NO 0 v aaen sies Buisseooud Y SI v Jl elep jeloeds sn p nb ol aun sd ls tewuns uonejueseJdeH SueN N dnoio uonno xz jo JequinN NN suononuisu uonoun J suononuisu ureJ6eiq Jeppe 280 V series S2T 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 1uno9 NMO 440 1 juno9 dN NO wojeq ees n v
83. for active step there are no multiple step transitions by 1 scan in consecutively connected steps N lt For instance as shown in the diagram on the 100 right in a program in which the transition condition from step 100 to 101 and the 100 transition condition from step 101 to 102 are Q the same step 100 becomes active in the previous scan and when device has been switched ON in the present scan there 101 is transition to step 101 in the present scan Transition to step 102 will be from the next scan onward 102 3 Step transition processing means making the previous step inactive and the following step active if the transition condition is satisfied based on the result of evaluation of the transition condition 4 Execution of the action program corresponding to the active step is carried out by switching the power rail ON and executing the action program corresponding to the inactive step by switching the power rail OFF At this time as shown in the following diagram the execution sequence is from top to bottom and from left to right in branches The numerals in the diagram show the execution sequence of the action programs User s manual Functions 229 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Points to note The following is a list of points to note when creating SFC programs 230 V series S2T 1
84. function is not available for the SFC program block 2 The DEBUG mode function is available only when the programmer is connected directly to the S2T s programmer port 3 Program modification should not be made in the DEBUG mode Otherwise the DEBUG mode functions may not work correctly NOTE VAV In the D STOP and D RUN modes FAULT LED blinks And in the S STOP and S RUN modes FAULT and I O LEDs blink Both of above are not error User s manual Functions 127 5 RAS Functions PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 9 System diagnostics 1 28 V series S2T Display on programmer SW016 First error code first error code and SVVO17 Number of codes corresponding error message The following functions are provided for diagnosis of controlled system operation The system can be monitored easily using of these functions 1 Diagnostics display function By using the diagnostics display instruction DIAG in the user program the relevant error code 1 64 and error message maximum 12 characters per message can be displayed on the programmer screen Also the error code generated is stored in the special registers SW016 SW033 in order of generation up to a maximum of 16 codes and the annunciator relay S0340 S037F corresponding to the error code goes ON It is possible to use the special register relay to display the error code on an external display monitor The error codes registered can be reset
85. have an action program part which corresponds 1 to 1 Only 1 initial step can be programmed in 1 block SSSS m ssss Step number 0 4095 3 Step This expresses one unit of contral steps The step has its own step numbers and has an action program part which corresponds 1 to 1 SSSS ssss Step number 0 4095 4 Transition This expresses the conditions for shifting the active state from a step to the following step Transition has a transition condition part which corresponds 1 to 1 b SFC End This expresses the end of an SFC main program An SFC main program requires either this SFC end or the end step of 6 The SFC end has a transition condition which corresponds 1 to 1 and a return destination label number When transition condition is satisfied with the step immediately before being in the active state the step following the designation label is made active with making the step immediately before inactive This is the same operation as that described in SFC jump below IIII 111 Label number 0 1023 222 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 6 End Step This expresses the end of an SFC main program An SFC main program requires either this end step or the SFC end of 5 The end step has the same step number as the initial step When the immediately preceding transition condition is satisfied the initial step returns to the active state SSSS 5555
86. is simply the program in this example select P Program Sys Info i QLoad karK PLC Program Sys Info gt i Transfer T P xerkfile s proqram and system information to PLE Info Gg TU NI aer ER Cer Lancet u The programmer will await execution confirmation Key in Y Qvsad Work PLC Prograg amp Sys Infe Transfer T P S workfile x program ami system information to PLC Cancel olmu nu 2 4 When correct loading has been carried out Complete will be displayed 66 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 Programming Example 9 When the loading of the program has been completed by the above operations operate the S2T RUN mode and debug the program Here try to change the S2T mode by the Control command of the T PDS First display the initial menu by pressing Esc Enter and then select P Program The T PDS will enter the monitor mode for the program which has been loaded in the S2T Here select F9 Control from the command line HU Fame 80810 TON TB641 4 lt gt PARA YER 1 TOBEE 9862 RADO 16 4444144 2 B BUN F Ferce RUN E Error reset E cancel B HEB B NOTE VAV When the S2T is put into the RUN mode with the aim of program debugging and test running take thorough precautions for safety s
87. makes active the designated initial step by making the steps in a designated area inactive Either of the two methods of an SFC instruction or a ladder diagram instruction is used One SFC initialization is required for 1 SFC main program SFO Instruction Nxx V SFC initialization nnnn This instruction connects ssss 11 to the initial step r Initial step Operands xx Program number 0 63 Start up device except T and C nnnn Number of initialized steps 1 4096 Function When the device with the exception of a timer device or a counter device designated by changes from OFF to ON the number of steps following the initial step ssss which are designated by nnnn from step number ssss to ssss nnnn 1 are made inactive and the initial step ssss is made active Q Ladder Diagram Instruction FUN 241 Input SFIZ nnnn ssss E Output Operands nnnnzN umber of initialized steps 1 4096 ssss Step number of initial step 0 4095 Function When the input changes from OFF to ON the number of steps designated by nnnn from the step number designated by ssss from step number ssss to ssss nnnn 1 are made inactive and the initial step designated by ssss is made active User s manual Functions 221 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 2 Initial Step This is the step which indicates the start of an SFC main program It has its own step number and can
88. mode set value CSV Derivative time To Last derivative value D M mode MV input MMV Dead band GP Last PV PV MV tracking input TMV A mode initial SV ISV Last SV SV Mode setting MODE Input filter constant FT i Integral remainder Ir ASV differential limit DSV Derivative remainder Dr MMV differential limit DMMV ii Internal MV MV A mode Auto mode Initial status STS Internal counter C C mode Cascade mode MV upper limit MH i Control interval At M mode Manual mode MV lower limit ML MV differential limit DMV Control interval setting n 248 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language Control block diagram Integral control Integral Auto 1 x mode Ti s ASV An MVn ing Proportional Differential AMVn MVOn n Gap en j un Kp wvs H L P DMV T A MV CS 7 A x Ale caen n Cascade Derivative RV mode TD s ADn DMMV Manual KRS Differential limit mode PVn MVS Velodty gt Position PVC MVn MVn 1 gt AMVn Wa H L Upper lower limit Digital filter DMV Differential limit Integral action control When MV is limited H L DMV and the integral value has same sign as limit over integral action is stopped Velocity gt Position conversion In Direct mode MV increases when PV is increased gt MV MV AMV In Reverse mode MV decreases when PV is incre
89. peBueuo si Indu ueuM v 941 190811 gtt 19aquinu Bunseu e m UB ON Fa Ul AA 1958 0J uOO 1 SEN sel Z 1 Buriseu e si u NO S ind l SON YOW Buipuodsauoo o reu Jamod NO suun 4 1aquinu Bunseu 67 e H SOW FE yum 18S 0 1400 1 SEN yel 600 L H YON 7 ese O JUO9 Je1se N NO S indui SOIN U UM YIN DU SOIN U M Q e1 amod NO sun _ 60 0 L H SON 195 0 1400 1 1SEVN Je1si6e1 jejunoo si g NO O indino sum _ y Aq payloads anjen jas 0 jenbe s ulo q enje nad avo z v Aq peut en Jas 0 wooaq enjeA 8 v 3 yaqunog junoo u8uM NO eWOd sey O Indu junoo y sown O LIN22 HE jo ay sjunoo NO S 3 Indu ejgeue ueuM y 19 sibaJ 810 2 Jeun si g NO sewo indu uaym Buluels y a ss v Jeun 1049 l5uls Aq payloads poued jas ay 40 UO NO indino sun JejsiDoeJ Jeun 51 g 44O juem 1ndui souls pasdeja T Buin e 810 e sey y Aq payloads poued jas uaym 440 1ndino suun x a 301 V J9 S 691 1euun si g NO awed indu souls p sdel 3 Aen suononulsu SES seu v Aq payloads poued jes ueuw NO 1ndino sun xo v PINO eouenbog sn T aun sd ls AISUIuUDS uolyejuasaiday SUEN N dnoio uomno x3 Jo JequinN NN suononujsu eouenbes suononujsu Wesbeig Jeppe User s manual Functions 269 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language
90. portions of the explanation in Part 1 are summarized for ease of understanding Related manuals Before reading this manual The following related manuals are available for the S2T S2T User s Manual Hardware This manual covers the S2T s main body and basic l O their specifications handling maintenance and services S2T User s Manual Functions This document explains the functions of the S2T and how to use them The necessary information to create user programs is covered in this volume T series Instruction Set This manual provides the detailed specifications of instructions for Toshiba s T series Programmable Controllers T PDS Basic Operation Manual This manual explains how to install the T series program development system T PDS into your personal computer and provides basic programming operations T PDS Command Reference Manual This manual explains all the commands of the T series program development system T PDS in detail T series Computer Link Function This manual explains the specification and handling method of the T series Programmable Controller s Computer Link function User s manual Functions 5 Before reading this manual Note and caution Users of this manual should pay special attention to information symbols preceded by the following symbols Calls the reader s attention to information considered important for full understandings of programming procedures and or operation of the equipment
91. range 0 0 to 100 0 B 11 B 10 Input filter constant FT 0 to less than 1 Data range 0 0 to less than 1 0 B 13 B 12 ASV differential limit DSV 0 to 100 At Data range 0 0 to 100 0 B 15 B 14 differential limit DMMV 0 to 100 At Data range 0 0 to 100 0 250 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language B 17 B 16 Initial status STS B 17 B 16 E 0 F C 8 4 0 A E Initial operation mode 00 Manual mode 01 Auto mode 10 Cascade mode 11 Reserve Direct reverse selection 0 Direct 1 Reverse B 19 B 18 MV upper limit MH 25 to 125 96 Data range 25 0 to 125 0 B421 B420 MV lower limit ML 25 to 125 96 Data range 25 0 to 125 0 B 23 B 22 MV differential limit DMV 0 to 100 At Data range 0 0 to 100 0 B 25 B 24 Control interval setting n 1 to 32767 times Data range 1 0 to 32767 0 Executes PID every n scan Therefore control interval At n x constant scan interval It is treated as n 1 when n lt 0 C 1 C Manipulation value MV 25 to 125 96 Data range 25 0 to 125 0 C 3 C 2 Internal work area C 15 C 14 Operation 1 When the instruction input is OFF Initializes the FPID3 instruction Operation mode is set as specified by B 17 B 16 A 10 bit 0 1 B 16 bit 0 1 Auto mode SV is set as specified by B 9 B 8 ASV ISV Manual mode MV is set as current MV MMV MV Internal calculation data is initialized MV re
92. range and expression format are shown in the following Table Numerical Value Binary Expression Hexadecimal Decimal y EXP Expression 9999 1001 1001 1001 1001 9999 9998 1001 1001 1001 1000 9998 J J J 10 0000 0000 0001 0000 0010 9 0000 0000 0000 1001 0009 J J J 1 0000 0000 0000 0001 0001 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 NOTE VAV Basically BCD is a data format used for data inputs from BCD output type numerical setting devices and data outputs to BCD input type numerical display devices However the S2T is provided with dedicated instructions which execute the calculations on BCD data as they stand 4 Unsigned Double Length Integer This is 32 bit unsigned integer which is expressed using 2 consecutive registers n the case of double length data the registers are designated in the form 1 AB A indicates the lower 16 bits and 3 1 shows the upper 16 bits 1 is the register following register 2 MSB LSB F 0 F 0 Bit positions b Register A Lower 16 bits Register A 1 Upper 16 bits Example When processing an unsigned double length integer in double length register D0201eD0200 D0200 becomes and D0201 becomes 1 D0200 becomes the lower side and D0201 becomes the upper side In programming when D0200 is entered in the position which designates the double length operand D0201eD0200 is automatically displayed
93. relay 7 S0347 Annunciator relay 8 S0348 Annunciator relay 9 S0349 Annunciator relay 10 S034A Annunciator relay 11 S0348 Annunciator relay 12 S034C Annunciator relay 13 S034D Annunciator relay 14 S034E Annunciator relay 15 S034F Annunciator relay 16 1 66 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data 7 Name Function S0350 1 Annunciator relay 17 e The annunciator relays corresponding to the error codes registered S0351 Annunciator relay 18 in SW018 SW033 become ON S0352 Annunciator relay 19 S0353 Annunciator relay 20 S0354 Annunciator relay 21 S0355 Annunciator relay 22 S0356 Annunciator relay 23 S0357 Annunciator relay 24 S0358 Annunciator relay 25 S0359 Annunciator relay 26 S035A Annunciator relay 27 S035B Annunciator relay 28 S035C Annunciator relay 29 S035D Annunciator relay 30 5035 Annunciator relay 31 S035F Annunciator relay 32 S0360 Annunciator relay 33 0361 Annunciator relay 34 0362 Annunciator relay 35 0363 Annunciator relay 36 0364 Annunciator relay 37 0365 Annunciator relay 38 0366 Annunciator relay 39 0367 Annunciator relay 40 S0368 Annunciator relay 41 0369 Annunciator relay 42 S036A Annunciator relay 43 S036B Annunciator relay 44 S036C Annunciator relay 45 S036D Annunciator relay 56 S036E Annunciator relay 47 S0
94. s manual Functions 273 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 2 0 0 0 1 V sies pue V ur ui salo s y ay sepeoeud Ajeyeipeuuuur yorum 1 V 2913p ay jo squejuoo eui sexe wys eoneq 92 UG 9 8 SE nsa eui o Buipuoooe seDueuo Bey Areo ay 1 CU ndui uonoeuip eui Jo aye s ay uo spu d p uonoaJIp lus eui 1y6L eui o1 40 ya eui 0 1q Wau syys pue y eoivep ay Aq pepeeu u au JO Sjuajuoo ay saye uononuisui eui NO Sawo S indui 145 ay uaym ueui NO S 3 Mdu ejqeue eui 49181691 us jeuonoeuipig GZ UL Gg nsoeJ ay o Buipioooe sabueyo Bey Areo eu e eui 0 11q lay 5115 pue y eui q pepeeu seoi ep u au Jo sjuajuoJ9 ay sexe uononumsur eui NO S uuo2o S indui ius ay ueym NO S 3 Indu ejqeue eui JI JeisiBe 1149 vL 4620 112 jjnseJ eui o Sulpioooe sebueyo Bey Aueo eu y Aq p yeorpul sq jo sequunu eui Aq uonoeuip GSW yal y o11 5149 pue g Aq pepeeu li yq eui sexe 3914 p P si g ueuM Aq p leolpul spiom Jo Jaquinu eui Aq uol o uip ssejppe uiu ya eui 011 Sylus pue g Aq pepeeu lqe piom w eui s y 19 siBaJ e 51 g ueuM a u Hsu v yO PUS SYA u l qq tu eZ UE Org Oe jjnseJ eui o Buipuoooe sebueyo Bey Zire eu y Aq pereoipur 910 jo Jaquunu eui q uonoeurp 897 lu u eui 011 syys pue g Aq pepeeu
95. the execution cannot finish within this time limit the execution will be interrupted and re started in the next scan In the constant scan mode The activated sub program s will be executed in idle time from completion of the main program execution to the beginning of the next scan f the sub program execution cannot finish within this time limit the execution will be interrupted and re started in the next scan There are two execution modes in the normal mode operation the one time execution and the cyclic execution In the one time mode the sub program will be activated when the Sub n start flag changes from OFF to ON In the cyclic mode the sub program will be cyclically activated every designated number of scans during the Sub n start flag is ON User s manual Functions 97 3 User Program Execution Control PART 2 FUNCTIONS One time mode The sub program start request is checked at each time of the main program and the sub program execution completed f two or more start requests occur at a time the order of priority will be as follows Sub 2 gt Sub 3 gt Sub 4 When the sub program is activated the start flag is reset automatically e Operation example in the floating scan i Scan Scan _ Scan Scan Scan y Hm gt t oO I I I I I Sub 2 ES Sub 3 stopped 2 Sub 4 7 7 Time limit i E ee oe AO d 13000 av vo la e o
96. the RAM ROM switch is in the ROM side and the Operation mode switch is in the RUN position the user program and the leading 4k words of the data register D0000 to D4095 stored in the peripheral memory flash memory will be transferred to the main memory RAM in accordance with the following conditions e Initial load will not be performed if the user program is written in the flash memory but the contents are destroyed BCC error detection In this case the S2T will enter the ERROR mode e Initial load will not be performed if the S2T is in the Hot restart mode from power interruption Q User data initialization User data initialization takes place Refer to 2 2 System initialization for detailed initialization User data initialization will not be performed if the S2T is in the Hot restart mode from power interruption mounting check The I O module mounting status is checked based on the I O allocation information Refer to details in 5 RAS functions User program check BCC check will be performed on the user program in the main memory RAM Refer to 5 RAS functions for details amp Scan mode setting Setting of the scan mode floating scan or constant scan will be performed The scan mode is explained in 2 4 1 84 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Internal Operation 2 4 1 Scan mode Batch I O processing G l el Data exchange between the I O image table I O register device and the
97. the left and when the designated number of times is reached execution is shifted to the rung following the NEXT instruction When the FOR instruction input is OFF execution is normal When the CALL instruction input is ON execution is shifted to the rung following the SUBR instruction with the corresponding sub routine number 20 in the example in the left When the RET instruction is reached execution is returned to the instruction following the CALL instruction the numbers in the diagram on the left are the execution sequence at this time When the CALL instruction input is OFF execution is normal User s manual Functions 21 5 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION General information on ladder diagram instructions 21 6 V series S2T The general information required for designing programs with ladder diagram are listed below 1 In all program types it is necessary to create at least one block by ladder diagram In other words the ends of the main program and each sub program are judged by ladder diagram END instruction Also the end of each interrupt program is judged by a ladder diagram IRET instruction Furthermore it is necessary to compose the entry to and exit from a sub routine by the ladder diagram SUBR instruction and RET instruction 2 The group of instructions which includes the timer instructions 4 types counter instruction jump control instruction master control
98. to the W register Channel 1 320 is allocated to the blocks 1 to 16 and channel 2 S20 is allocated to the blocks 17 to 32 The allocation example below shows the case of all the blocks are set as LINK S2Ts link register ooch Setting CH1 S20 CH2 S20 w CH1 CH2 Scan memory scan memory VVO000 W0063 1 LINK 0000 0063 VVO064 W0127 2 LINK 0064 0127 VVO128 W0191 3 LINK 0128 0191 VV0192 W0255 4 LINK 0192 0255 W0256 W0319 S LINK 0256 0319 W0320 W0383 6 LINK 0320 0383 W0384 W0447 7 LINK 0384 0447 VV0448 W0511 8 LINK 0448 0511 W0512 W0575 9 LINK 0512 0575 W0576 W0639 10 LINK 0576 0639 VVO640 W0703 11 LINK 0640 0703 W0704 W0767 12 LINK 0704 0767 VVO768 W0831 13 LINK 0768 0831 W0832 W0895 14 LINK 0832 0895 W0896 W0959 15 LINK 0896 0959 VVO960 W1023 16 LINK 0960 1023 W1024 W1087 17 LINK 0000 0063 W1088 W1151 18 LINK 0064 0127 W1152 W1215 19 LINK 0128 0191 VV1216 W1279 20 LINK 0192 0255 W1280 W1343 21 LINK 0256 0319 W1344 W1407 22 LINK 0320 0383 W1408 W1471 23 LINK 0384 0447 W1472 W1535 24 LINK 0448 0511 W1536 W1599 25 LINK 0512 0575 W1600 W1663 26 LINK 0576 0639 W1664 W1727 27 LINK 0640 0703 W1728 W1791 28 LINK 0704 0767 W1792 W1855 29 LINK 0768 0831 W1856 W1919 30 LINK 0832 0895 W1920 W1983 31 LINK 0896 0959
99. to the next slot Hereafter carry out the required settings using the same procedure 3 XY 4 D 5 B iXeY 2 Z B SF PT BW E 168 F 322 6 647 H 120 r 1 imit 88 Unit ki lmit 2 fait ts i Slet i Slot 18 Slot Lat Slot iu PU I 1 eI BI 1 8r 1 at x ai El 1 1 1f I i 10 Y aa z z 1 21 1 2 Y W 3t i 3 3I 3 i 4t 1 af 1 4 I af 5 I 5 5I 5 6 6 6 s f 7 1 T 1 1 1 TE 8 Bi 1 gl 8 t 1 3 1 st 1 a i 8 mt I wa 1 mi 1 i enter mulhle type and rerister size Tar TETTE Topleq C ENA Clear NETT User s manual Functions 53 6 Programming Example PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING After completing required settings write this information in the work file Select F5 Write from the command line Unit s Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 1 Register No Top Register Na Top Register No Top Register No i I 1 1 D 1 I 1 1 i tnit t amp lnit i Unit B lbit 22 Slot Slat rnm Siot 1 0 Slnt ru PU i 1 al ar ei 1 B x mi 11 11 1 11 11 Y Ni 21 1 21 1 21 1 21 Y M 3 1 31 1 3 1 3E 41 1 41 1 4 F 4 5t 51 1 51 1 51 1 61 1 6 1 61 1 B 1 7 1 7 I 71 I 1 8 1 1 al 1 81 1 i 8 I 3 1 3 1 31 l 8 J mi 1 m t 1 18 I f mum iy N Me 5 FS TT F Fa Fit i The programmer w
100. value ASV is over written by current CSV automatically ASV CSV e MV tracking This function is available in auto and cascade modes When the tracking designation A 5 bit 2 is ON tracking input TMV is directly output as MV Manipulation value upper lower limit MH ML is effective but differential limit DMV is not effective When the tracking designation is changed to OFF the operation is started from the current MV MOIE VAV PID3 instruction is only usable on the main program e PID3 instruction must be used under the constant scan mode The constant scan interval can be selected in the range of 10 to 200 ms 10 ms increments e The data handled by the PID3 instruction are units Therefore process input value PVC manipulation value MV etc should be converted to 96 units scaling before and or after the PID3 instruction PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 5 6 4 Expanded data transfer XFER FUN 236 XFER Expanded data transfer Expression Input A XFER B gt C Output Function When the input is ON data block transfer is performed between the source which is indirectly designated by A and A 1 and the destination which is indirectly designated by C and C 1 The transfer size number of words is designated by B The transfer size is 1 to 256 words except for writing into flash memory Data transfer between the following objects are availab
101. when standby mode S111E Offline ON vvhen offline mode S111F Down ON when down mode Refer to the TOSLINE S20 manual for details 1 74 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data ds Name Function SW112 station No 1 No 16 The corresponding bit is ON when the station is SW113 TOSLINE S20 station No 17 No 32 oning SW114 CH1 online map station No 33 No 48 e The lowest station number corresponds to bit 0 SW115 station No 49 No 64 in the SW register and in the order SVV116 station No 1 No 16 SVV117 TOSLINE S20 station No 17 No 32 Sw118 CH2 online map station No 33 No 48 SW119 station No 49 No 64 SW120 station No 1 No 16 e The corresponding bit is ON when the station is SW121 TOSLINE S20 station No 17 No 32 standby sw122 CH1 standby map station No 33 No 48 e The lowest station number corresponds to bit 0 SW123 station No 49 No 64 in the SW register and in the order SW124 station No 1 No 16 SVV125 TOSLINE S20 station No 17 No 32 sw126 CH2 standby map station No 33 No 48 SW127 station No 49 No 64 a Name Function SW128 W0000 W0015 e The corresponding bit is ON when the W SW129 VV0016 W0031 register is updat
102. without fully understanding the internal processes of the S2T However understanding the outline of the internal processes will be effective in producing more efficient programs and in carrying out appropriate debugging The following drawing gives a S2T internal process overview C Power On Y Self diagnosis System Initialization always ERROR mode Initial Load Y User Data Initialization Y HALT mode H Operation Mode Control v RUN RUN F mode v Batch Input Processing Y Batch Output Processing Y User Program Execution O Initial Load 22 V series S2T 1 Whole user program 2 Leading 4k words of data register D0000 to D4095 User program memory RAM Flash memory H lt Program HEND Data a E Data La o use Input lt Input Z module Output gt Output module When the RAM ROM switch is in ROM and the operation mode switch is in RUN the following contents stored in the flash memory will be transferred to the S2T RAM at power up and at transiting from the HALT mode to the RUN mode PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 2 Operation Outline Q User Data Initialization User data data register timer counter input register output register etc are initialized User data is explained in Section 5 G Batch Input
103. 0001 1X3N HO4 621 u q payloads s uu Jo Jeun eui nb ds 2 X3N 0 Oy UJ0JJ uonoes ay seinoax3 869 z HH uuo uO4 dool X3N HO4 261 SE L z dun peuonpuoo y 10 uolleuns p dun y sejeoipul H uu 181 H Jeqej dwnf 961 uu Jequunu Jeqe we PE au 10 ege o sduunf NO s indui y y L ww anne 869 L eunnoaqns ey jo pue eui s yeorpul H ont uinje eunnogns 621 uu Jequunu eurnoJgns ay JO o41uoo 970 6 2 unnouqns ay sile uononuisur v NO S 1101 au Ji H uu N TIVO H je eunnoiqns 821 wei6old sn ON peunbejeumn sdeis Kyeuiung uonejueseJdeH SUEN dnoio uonnoax3 yo JequINN Nr suononuisu uonoun J suononuisu ureJ6elq Jeppe 282 V series S2T 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Lol ui synsal eui sejois pue g Jo enjeA 8901 1 7 ay Buisn y jo sjuajuoo ay 0 wuj jeddn ue seiddy seCh o gin v ln ULU uollounq Buipuodseuoo ay uo 041u09 4JO NO U LL 6 0Z G no sales pue y lqe 40 anjea Bulnes uoneAnoeep o g u Wvo v Jeouenbes We 651 pue uoneAgoe eui yum g 19481601 ay sejeduio O 9192 4q eui 0 u sindino pue 4equunu L 09 deis siy o 8uipuodsaeuoo indino y dn syoo uononulsul ay y lqe uueged indino erep eui Duer G 9 ldu ys loiz Pub s d
104. 1 Avoid using the same sub routine in the main program the sub programs and the interrupt programs When the main program execution is interrupted during a sub routine is being executed and the same sub routine is executed in that state the results after re starting are sometimes not as expected 2 There is no classification of user data register device by program type Therefore take thorough precautions that there is no erroneous mixed use between program types Example RO interrupt YO Ls AO RO Y1 A C2 Interrupt occurs through the timing in the above diagram And when the content of RO is modified in the interrupt the simultaneous ON or the simultaneous OFF of YO and Y1 which normally could not occur happens 3 Try to execute the exchange of data between different program types by 1 instruction or by using the interrupt disable DI and the interrupt enable El instructions Otherwise the same thing as in 2 above may happen Example Composition of the main program when transferring the three data D1000 D1001 and D1002 from the interrupt program to the main program D1000 MOV D2000 D1001 MOV D2001 1 D1002 MOV D2002 User s manual Functions 233 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION In the above program when an interrupt occurs between instructions synchronization between D2000 D2001 and D2002 cannot be guaranteed In this case
105. 2T according to the S20 s receive send setting For the blocks set as GLOBAL the data transfer is as follows 1 If CH1 is receive and CH2 is send CH1 receive data is read and written into both W register and CH2 2 If CHI is send and CH2 is receive CH2 receive data is read and written into both W register and CH1 3 If both CH1 and CH2 are send W register data is written into both CH1 and CH2 4 If both CH1 and CH2 are receive The receive data of GLOBAL setting channel is read and stored in W register NOTE VAV PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 4 VO Allocation TOSLINE F10 The TOSLINE F10 has 32 words of scan data memory in the module Up to 8 TOSLINE F10 can be mounted on a S2T n this case the TOSLINE F10 nearer to the S2T CPU is assigned in sequence from CH1 to CH8 For theTOSLINE F10 set LINK for all existing CHs by the network assignment By this setting the link registers LW are assigned to the TOSLINE F10 in units of 32 words from the lowest address e Network assignment when 4 TOSLINE F10s are mounted CH Setting Assigned link register LW 1 LINK LW000 LW031 2 LINK LW032 LW063 S LINK LW064 LW095 4 LINK LWO96 LW127 5 6 8 The data transfer direction betvveen the link registers LVV and the scan data in the TOSLINE F10 is determined by S2T CPU according the TOSLINE F10 netvvork configuration NOTE VAV For details of the
106. 3 NOTE VAV Note that when SFC label corresponding to SFC end or SFC jump is not present or when SFC labels with the same label number are present in multiple locations an error will occur when RUN starts up 16 Wait Step This is a step which measures the time after becoming active and does no execute transition even if the following transition condition is satisfied until a set time has elapsed It has an action program corresponding 1 to 1 ssss Step number 0 4095 SSSS Ch Timer register T000 T999 Q xxxxx Set time 0 65535 XXXXX Note TOOO user are 0 01 second timers user T999 are 0 1 second timers 17 Alarm Step This is a step which measures the time after becoming active and when the transition condition is not satisfied within a set time switches ON a designated alarm device t has an action program corresponding 1 to 1 When the transition condition is satisfied and the alarm step becomes inactive the alarm device also becomes OFF ssss Step number 0 4095 ssss A G Timerregister T000 T999 O xxxxx Set time 0 65535 XXXXX Alarm device other than X T C 6 Note T000 user are 0 01 second timers user T999 are 0 1 second timers 226 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language Action program and transition condition mn TO E L 4 L 1 4 L 4 The action program corresponds to 1 ste
107. 3 235 268 41 138 143 144 146 155 156 157 223 224 231 233 246 38 141 73 37 38 48 59 75 77 88 91 98 100 102 107 113 117 120 127 138 141 143 150 205 207 143 41 104 113 115 130 143 150 179 224 38 143 81 86 89 95 46 89 95 165 167 171 35 36 209 180 186 180 182 186 271 280 77 79 81 84 86 88 107 128 141 142 143 144 26 45 48 77 79 81 84 86 88 96 98 100 102 107 119 121 122 128 135 137 141 142 144 143 159 233 80 81 88 20 26 47 75 81 86 89 92 93 96 137 148 149 203 26 28 31 37 98 100 102 117 120 122 135 137 Index 138 141 157 BET een LU a Pp 17 20 24 26 28 30 31 37 38 40 41 43 45 47 73 75 77 79 80 81 86 88 89 90 91 92 93 96 98 100 102 106 111 117 118 119 120 122 124 135 137 138 139 141 146 147 157 173 148 149 203 220 224 241 W Watchdog timer Ne E 125 299 6F8C0928 Integrated Controller series
108. 3 User Data 7 Name Function S0400 Hot restart mode ON when hot restart mode setting by program is available S0401 HOLD device ON during HOLD mode setting by program is available 0402 Reserve for future use S0403 Sub program 2 mode 0507 ps 5 S0404 Reserve for future use S0405 Sub program 2 execution mode On n n SON Gee qe setting S0406 Sub program 3 execution mode s E de setting S0407 Sub program 4 execution mode s 00 de setting S0408 Reserve for future use S0409 Sub program 2 request Sub program 2 request command Execution request by setting ON S040A Sub program 3 request Sub program 3 request command Execution request by setting ON S040B Sub program 4 request Sub program 4 request command Execution request by setting ON S040C S040D eater Reserve for future use S040F S0410 Sub program 1 execution status ON during sub program 1 execution S0411 1 Sub program 2 execution status ON during sub program 2 execution 0412 Sub program 3 execution status ON during sub program 3 execution S0413 Sub program 4 execution status ON during sub program 4 execution 0414 Reserve for future use 0415 Sub program 2 delay Warning ON when sub program 2 execution delay cyclic mode S0416 Sub program 3 delay Warning ON when sub program 3 execution delay cyclic mode
109. 36F Annunciator relay 48 User s manual Functions 167 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Special Name Function device S0370 Annunciator relay 49 The annunciator relays corresponding to the error codes registered S0371 Annunciator relay 50 in SW018 SW033 become ON 0372 Annunciator relay 51 0373 Annunciator relay 52 S0374 Annunciator relay 53 S0375 Annunciator relay 54 S0376 Annunciator relay 55 S0377 Annunciator relay 56 S0378 Annunciator relay 57 S0379 Annunciator relay 58 S037A Annunciator relay 59 S037B Annunciator relay 60 S037C Annunciator relay 61 S037D Annunciator relay 62 S037E Annunciator relay 63 S037F Annunciator relay 64 SW38 Programmer port response delay 0 30x10 ms Special Name Function device S0390 Timer interrupt execution status S0391 I O interrupt 1 execution status S0392 I O interrupt 2 execution status S0393 I O interrupt 3 execution status 50394 I O interrupt 4 execution status ON during execution S0395 I O interrupt 5 execution status S0396 I O interrupt 6 execution status S0397 I O interrupt 7 execution status S0398 I O interrupt 8 execution status 0399 S039A S039B S039C Reserve for future use S039D S039E S039F 1 68 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION
110. 5 D0100 l indicates 00105 For indirect address designation see Section 3 4 1 58 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data Tables of special register special relays are shown below Overall map Register Content SW000 Operation mode error flags warning flags SW001 CPU error related flags SW002 I O error related flags SW003 Program erro related flags IC memory card status SW004 SW005 Timing relays Carry flag error flag SW006 Flags related to error during program execution SW007 SW013 SW014 Clock calendar data Year month day hour minute second day of the week Flags related to bit pattern check data validity check SW015 SW016 SW033 Flags related to I O error mapping etc Diagnosis display record system diagnosis SW034 SW037 Annunciator relay system diagnosis SW038 Reserve for future use SW039 Interrupt program execution status SW040 Sub program execution control SVV041 Sub program execution status SW042 SW044 Sub program execution intervals for cyclic mode SW045 Power interruption continuous operation time SW046 SW049 I O error map SW050 SW077 Reserve for future use User s manual Functions 159 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Overall map continued Re
111. 60 XW061 0 X4W XW000 XW003 7 11 X2W XVV062 XW063 1 X4W XVVOO4H1 XW007 21 X2W XWO064 XVVO65 21 XAW XVVOOS XVVO11 3 X2VV XVV066 XW067 3 X2W XW012 XW013 4 X2W XW068 XW069 4 X2W XVV014 XW015 5 X2W XWO070 XW071 51 1XVVO16 XW017 6 X2W XWO072 XW073 6 X2W XW018 XW019 7 7 3 90 0 Y2W YWO90 YWO91 1 30 01 YAW YWOSO YWOS3S3 11 Y2W 1YVVO92 YWO93 1 YAW YWOS34 YW037 2 Y1W YWO094 21 Y2W YWOS38 YWO39 3 Y1W YWO095 3 Y2W 1YVV040 YW041 4 Y1W YWO096 41 Y2W 1YVV042 YW043 51 YAW YWO97 5 Y2W YWO44 YW045 6 6 Y2W YWO046 YW047 7 7 30 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 3 VO Allocation MOIE VAV 1 Apart from register address skipping between units when the unit base address setting function is used it follows the I O allocation rules described in Section 3 3 2 A setting which gives a latter stage unit a low register address cannot be performed For example a setting by which the base address of Unit 1 is 50 and the base address of Unit 2 is 30 cannot be performed 3 When automatic UO allocation is performed there is no base address designation for any unit The registers are allocated in succession As described in Section 3 3 User s manual Functions 31 4 User Program PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 4 1 User program configuration
112. 6F8C0928 TOSHIBA Integrated Controlle Sequence Controller S2T User s Manual Function guNEFENFEEFEEFEFEFEENESENEEENENEHHSSJSJ wWwggg s3s ggdmgm E F E K H H P P P H T H P P P H P R jD E R H E B R E Eu ENHEENEIENEENEENEENENEPBSENESNNBBSSS83 93 ENG WEE R ee E E R H H II III EIERE EE Ve T P P E P P H P P P K P K D P E jP RE B ET Wee T BP P E P T P P PPP P K D P R P F P Y B E K H T P P E H T P P P P E B R D P R D F P F FE E SPP PP PP PPP PP PPP PPP ga GN uo PPP H H PPP PPP PPP P P EE ER PPP PP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP EE PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP F P RE F E eN PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP E WN H PP PPP PP PPP PPP PPP F P F F E Pee PP PP PPP PPP PPP PPP PP PPP EE Pee PP PP PPP PPP PPP PP PPP PPP Pee PPP PPP PPP PP PPP PPP PPP EE E a a PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP EPP PPP PPP PPP PP PPP PPP s m m m E m m m PPP S E E m E E E s PP PPP E E m E E NE s EP PPP S E m E PPP PPP S m E m NE s m E NE s NE NS NE NE General Information Hazard Classifications This ma
113. 8 W0640 W0655 SW169 W0656 W0671 SW170 W0672 W0687 SW171 W0688 W0703 SW172 W0704 W0719 SW173 W0720 W0735 SW174 W0736 W0751 SW175 W0752 W0767 1 76 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data 7 Name Function SW176 VVO768 W0783 The corresponding bit is ON when the W SW177 WO0784 W0799 register is updated normally SW178 W0800 W0815 SW179 W0816 W0831 e The lowest address of W register corresponds SW180 W0832 W0847 to bit 0 in the SW register and in the order SW181 W0848 W0863 SW182 W0864 W0879 SW183 TOSLINE S20 W0880 W0895 SW184 scan healthy map W0896 W0911 SW185 W0912 W0927 SW186 W0928 W0943 SW187 W0944 W0959 SW188 W0960 W0975 SW189 W0976 W0991 SW190 W0992 W1007 SW191 W1008 W1023 User s manual Functions 177 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Name Function Sw192 VV1024 W1039 The corresponding bit is ON when the W SW193 W1040 W1055 register is updated normally SVV194 W1056 W1071 SW195 VV1072 W1087 e The lowest address of W register corresponds SW196 W1088 W1103 to bit
114. 8 words Link devices 0000 999F corresponding to the leading 1000 words of the register 16000 points Functions Used for a data link by the TOSLINE S20 For the leading 1000 words W0000 W 0999 of he link registers bit designation is possible as link devices Z0000 Z999F For areas not allocated to TOSLINE S20 they can be used in the same way as auxiliary registers and data registers Codes Link registers LW Link relays L Addresses Link registers 000 255 256 vvords Link relays 000 255F 4096 points Functions Used as registers relays for remote l O by the TOSLINE F10 When TOSLINE F10 is not used they can be used in the same way as auxiliary relays Codes F Addresses 0000 32767 32768 words Functions Can be used in the same way as data registers for such as storing control parameters and storing field collection data Bit designation is not possible The whole file register area is retained for power off The file registers can also be used for the sampling buffer Codes I J K 3 types 3 words Addresses Functions When registers apart from index registers are used by instructions apart from the normal address designation system direct address designation for instance D0100 indirect designation indirect address designation for instance DO100 is possible by using the index registers If for instance the content of is
115. 9 L 2 ul lns i ay seJois pue y 1 y JO 9 6 v Steeg y Woy 8 1 8 Jo slueluo5 eui sloenqns L 4 9 8 1 8 a vv uonoengns uj amp uer eiqnoq 22 0 1 2 uir nsa1 ay soos pue v 1 y m Le 6 v siueiuoo eu o q 1 41 Jo siuejuoo oui sppv 4 a 1 8 q v ilv 1 uonppe ui amp uer ejqnog Le 9 u sepureua ay pue 2 ur juenonb ay seJois ah 69 Zb 8 sjuejuoo eui q y Jo siueiuoo eut sepia L o a v UOISIAI 6 O L O ut unso1 eui seJois sb 8011 Y pue g jo siuejuoo eui Aq Y JO siueiuoo eui senn L 0 1 0 g v uoneolld n 62 Lol ul ynsa ay saJo s pue Mots 60 Zey V jo sjuajuoo ay WO q jo sjuajuoo eui sioeuqns m o a v O ut 3jnsaJ eui se1ois 3 suonei do d Z pue V Jo sjue1uoo eui o q jo sjuajuoo eui sppy CR o a v ulu one WU a Aq pepeeu aiqe E Ugg Otvy v2 9 v Su o v Aq pepeeu u ezis jo eei eui jo sjuejuoo s u LON v FE 1 JSue4 pue ueAul e qeL 92 ay Buisuduuoo ejep pas ianal 11q ay SJ9JSUeJ I a Aq pepeeu eiqei eui o y 7 UBY O ZEHZ 9 7 La pepeeu u ezis jo ejqe eut JO slueluoo eu SIO SUBA l g u AOWL v Jejsuen lqeL Sz RAS y jo sjuajuoo eui Aq g 7 ULEO SSL 9 P q pepeeu u ezis jo age y 10 SIUSJUOO eui s zileilui a u zu g uonezyenu
116. ART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 2 Operation Outline 2 1 Operation modes and functions There are 3 modes of RUN HALT and ERROR as basic operation modes of the S2T Also as a variation of the RUN mode the RUN F mode is available for debugging RUN Mode RUN F Mode HALT Mode ERROR Mode MOIE This is the program execution mode The S2T repeats the reading of external inputs execution of the user program and the determination of external output states One cycle of this operation is called a scan Monitoring of the program execution state and forced input output can be performed using the programmer This is a mode to force the program execution even when the I O modules are not mounted ln the normal RUN mode this would give an I O no answer error This is used for program debugging This is the operation stop mode The S2T switches OFF all outputs and stops user program execution Normally programming is carried out in this mode Also writing the program into the flash memory in the case of the PU662T PU672T is available in this mode only This is the Error Down state When the S2T detects an error by self diagnosis which renders continuation of operation impossible it will switch OFF all outputs stop the use program execution and enter the ERROR mode n the ERROR mode all writing operations to the S2T are prohibited In order to escape from this mode it is necessary either execute Error Reset fro
117. CPU hardware check and initialization System ROM check system RAM check and initial set up peripheral LSI check and initial set up RTC LSI check and language processor LP check take place Power off time Power on time record The last time the power was switched off is recorded in the event history table and the present date and time read from the RTC LSI is recorded as power on time Also the present date and time are set into the special register SW007 SW013 Power interruption decision In the hot restart mode S0400 is ON if power off period is less than 2 seconds it is decided as power interruption n this case initial load and user data initialization explained below will not be carried out only when the last power off occurred in the RUN mode Battery check The battery voltage is checked for the user program and the user data backup f the battery voltage is lower than the specified value a message is recorded in the event history table batt voltage drop together with the special relay battery alarm flag SOOOF setting PART 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Internal Operation 5 Initial load The initial load means the term for the transfer of the contents of the user program and the leading Ak words of the data register D0000 to 04095 from the peripheral memory Flash Memory to the main memory RAM prior to running the user program The initial load is initiated when the power is turned on the operation
118. CS When the MCS input is ON 2 d execution is normal When the MCS input is OFF 5 execution is by making the 6 gt power rail from the rung n 1 following MCS to the rung of MCR OFF the execution MCR sequence is the same I nam PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language Jump Control JCS JCR 1 3 4 5 n k HE JCS H n 1 DENEN n m er Conditional Jump JUMP LBL 1 2 n JUMP N 03 n4 1 E nam nn 03 4 5 m EH s Repeat FOR NEXT FOR 10 imk HH NEXT times Sub Routine CALL SUBR RET 2 CALL N 20 HA Sub routine 3 SUBR 20 4 6 When the JCS input is ON the instructions from the rung following JCS to the rung of JCR are read and skipped at high Speed instructions are only read and not executed When the JCS input is OFF execution is normal When the JUMP instruction input is ON execution shifts to the rung following the LBL instruction with the corresponding label number 03 in the example on the left the numbers in the diagram on the left are the execution sequence at this time When the JUMP instruction input is OFF execution is normal When the FOR instruction input is ON the instructions between FOR and NEXT are repeatedly executed the designated number of times 10 times in the example on
119. Counter register C D DEBUG mode Data initialization Data register D me Rer Diagnostics display function Digit designation eerte teet e E ERROR mode Event history Execution time measurement function Expanded file register F Flash Memory idad a oett Floating point dala eere t pete e ee prete e 147 167 175 176 177 178 179 285 28 31 36 38 98 102 145 150 205 207 212 161 38 143 161 148 66 146 215 216 217 37 138 141 157 38 143 81 88 89 91 104 107 110 112 143 169 248 249 253 254 38 143 20 80 81 84 140 141 146 38 48 88 38 143 50 51 243 245 250 255 261 266 275 147 197 199 200 202 233 271 20 80 81 85 88 102 120 121 122 125 169 77 120 126 130 119 237 238 242 79 117 259 180 192 242 250 272 280 293 Index Floating SCAN rusia ep aedes ea ts deo Force f rnclionm onu nuege diede FUNCION DOCK morra rra ce o EPUM mo ERIS Function Instruction eere o o o As c b m ten m ot d H FAL ue e eterne cee o ca coste ec ocu ate LUN AD eI undue DM NC Hue o en ak HOLD MOS m u nach a Hot restante EE a
120. H4321 X003B X0038 X0037 X0034 X0033 X0030 002 002 Augend data 7 6 5 4 Addend data 0 0 5 0 U 0 pu in YWO10 L f 4 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data For a double length 32 bits operand all QO to Q8 are available Example 3 Q7 R0102 DMOV D0701 D0700 Double length transfer RVV011 RVVO10 Transferred data 0 2 Digit designation for a destination operand For single length 16 bits operand Q0 to Q4 are available The result data of the operation is stored in the specified digits of the destination register The digits which are out of the designated digits are unchanged Example 1 Q2 xwooo MOV R0018 Data transfer F 8 7 4 3 0 iP Transferred data RW001 Unchanged 2 digits started with R0018 R0018 ROOTF R0018 User s manual Functions 193 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 1 94 V series S2T Example 2 Q3 Q3 x0045 200 R1200 Addition XW005 XW004 Augend data Addend data Sum Destination OF DC 98 54 0 0 Q 200 U Ignored V 200 Unchanged V 200 R1200 If XW005 H0077 0000 0000 0111 0111 binary XW004 H182A 0001 1000 0010 1010 binary augend data is 0000 1000 1100 0001 binary H08C1 2241 decimal sum b
121. INFORMATION F E D C B 8 7 0 B Abn Busy Status 0 TermSTS B1 Transmission error information if TermSTS is HOB Inside the parameter Transfer parameter S20LP Ethernet MID network type 2 3 CH channel of self station 1or2 1to4 max two S20LP s on S2T max four EN611 EN631 s on S2T Target station No 1 to 64 0 fixed Request command 0 fixed H0021 Register read write Transfer size 1 to 128 1 to 485 number of words max 84 words for T or C register max 323 words for T or C register designation across T511 and T512 is designation across T511 and T512 not allowed is not allowed Register type H0000 XW YW register H0001 W register H0002 LW register H0003 RW register H0004 D register H0005 F register CPU H 05 Expanded F register expand memory 8k words bank is bank No 01 OF H 06 Expanded F register expand memory 64 words bank is bank No 01 08 H0007 T register H0008 C register H0009 SW register Leading address Designates the leading register address to be transferred Response time limit Specifies the time limit of the response from target station 0 1 s units When the bit F is set to ON the following default value is used S20LP 415 Ethernet 305 Target station IP address N A Designates the IP address of the target station Target station UDP port No N A Designates the UDP port No of the target st
122. Initial step number 0 4095 7 Sequence Selection divergence This transfers the active state to 1 step in which the transition condition is satisfied out of multiple connected steps When the transition conditions are satisfied simultaneously the step on the left has priority The number of branches is a maximum of 5 columns FEF 8 Sequence Selection convergence This collects into 1 step the paths diverged by above 7 EE User s manual Functions 223 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 9 Simultaneous Sequences divergence After the immediately preceding transition condition is satisfied this makes all the connected steps active The number of branches is a maximum of 5 columns 10 Simultaneous Sequences convergence When all the immediately preceding steps are active and the transition condition is satisfied this shifts the active state to the next step EEE 11 Macro Step A macro step corresponds to one macro program When the immediately preceding transition condition is satisfied this shifts the active state to macro program with the designated macro number When the transition advances through the macro program and reaches the macro end the active state is shifted to the step following the macro step A macro step is accompanied by a dummy transition which has no transition condition always true
123. MING INFORMATION 3 User Data 1 Unsigned Integer This is a 16 bit unsigned integer expressed by 1 register The bit configuration inside the register is as shown below MSB LSB FED CBA 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 lt Bit positions Register Bit O is the least significant bit LSB and bit F is the most significant bit MSB The processable numerical value range is as shown in the follovving Table Numerical Value Binary Expression Hexadecimal Decimal Expression 65535 1111 1111 1111 1111 FFFF 65534 1111 1111 1111 1110 FFFE J J 1 0000 0000 0000 0001 0001 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 MOIE VAV When programming and when program monitoring it is possible to change between decimal numbers and hexadecimal numbers for displaying setting register data When using a hexadecimal display H is attached before the numerical value Example H89AB hexadecimal 89AB 2 Integer This is a 16 bit integer expressed by 1 register A negative number is expressed by 2 s complement MSB LSB FEDCBA987 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit positions Register UK Data 15 bits Sign bit The numerical value is expressed by the 15 bits from bit O to bit E Bit F expresses the sign 0 when positive 1 when negative User s manual Functions 181 3 User Data PART 3
124. Mode SW HALT 1 In the table OP mode RAM ROM and Mode SW mean Operation mode RAM ROM switch and Operation mode switch respectively 2 means the switch status is not related to 3 In the OP mode transition factor column Mode SW gt XX means switching the Operation mode switch to XX position And Command XX means issue of the command XX from the programmer 4 Switching the Operation mode switch between RUN will not affect the operation mode However the protect state will be changed accordingly Refer to Section 5 4 5 In the Note column IL means initial load execution and INZ means the user data initialization 6 See Section 5 11 3 for the DEBUG mode functions User s manual Functions 81 2 Internal Operation PART 2 FUNCTIONS The following diagram illustrates the mode transition conditions Power on 1 o 3 E D HALT GIE RUN EE 1 z 2o o a i s 2 r i gt 2 EC o lt 35 SE CHE 2 r3 1 x e v 3 D Force RUND a g D STOP RUN F 5 S ert gt HALT orf HALTO ag D 2 D d T gt 2 2118 7 9 sl UE a S v D 7 ni ls E 3 ollo 5 DN r n 918 pS og mil 5 T UI 2 L3 ea v a HOLD D RUN d HOLD H HOLD Cancel mo 1 means the ERROR mode transition 2
125. N 5 Programming Language 5 5 3 Ethernet support The Ethernet module EN611 EN631 is available for the S2T By using the EN611 EN631 the S2T can be connected to Ethernet network Using the Ethernet module the S2T supports the following communication functions e Computer link function Host computer on the Ethernet can perform data read write S2T status read program up load down load etc for the S2T by using the T series computer link command Peer to peer communication By using SEND and RECV instructions any register data of a S2T can be sent to other S2T and any register data of other S2T can be read into a S2T via Ethernet e Socket service Communication between a computer and a S2T user program is available by using SEND and RECV instructions Maximum 8 ports of socket are available The protocol can be selected either TCP IP or UDP IP for each port Up to four EN611 EN631 s can be installed on a S2T To activate the EN611 EN631 SEND instruction is required to set parameters IP address UDP port number and to send commands communication start etc MOIE VAV 1 For details of the EN611 EN631 refer to the separate manual for EN611 EN631 User s manual Functions 239 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 6 Instructions 240 V series S2T This section explains the specifications of the following instructions Double word multiplication and division FU
126. N will be displayed under the Mode 6 Information 1 Information 2 Information 3 Indicates supplementary information regarding the error For example with an UO error the UO module position unit No slot No where the error occurred and the read write register address etc will be indicated 7 Mode Indicates the actual mode when the error was detected Also displays DOWN when error down occurs On the mode display INIT indicates the system initialization after power is turned on Refer to the separate S2T User s Manual Hardware for display details of detected errors and methods of proceeding User s manual Functions 111 5 RAS Functions 5 4 Power interruption detection function 5 4 1 Hot restart function 1 1 2 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS The S2T has one function that control the S2T s operation in the event That is the hot restart function which enables the restart from the power interruption without initialization of power interruption For the S2T the user can decide the operation re start condition at the recovery from the power interruption The hot restart function will be effective when the special relay S0400 is In this case if power is turned off in the RUN mode and recovered within 2 seconds the S2T moves into RUN mode without the initial load and the user data initialization set to ON S0400 1 By using this function together with the special mode of the sub program 2 the user
127. N042 D Combination instruction of multiplication and division for double word data This instruction is not available on the S2T Essential PID FUN156 PID3 PID Proportional Integral Derivative control instruction which has the following features Incomplete derivative action expanding stable application range Essential digital algorithm succeeding to benefits of analog PID This instruction is not available on the S2T Floating point essential PID FUN232 FPID3 Essential RID instruction for floating point data This instruction is not available on the S2T Expanded data transfer FUN236 XFER Data transfer instruction between special objects i e expanded file register data in flash memory TOSLINE S20 scan memory etc Some functions are added to this instruction for the S2T Network data send FUN239 SEND Used to peer to peer communication via TOSLINE S20LP or Ethernet This instruction is also used for Ethernet module EN611 EN631 control This instruction is not available on the S2T Network data receive FUN240 RECV Used to peer to peer communication via TOSLINE S20LP or Ethernet This instruction is also used for Ethernet module EN611 EN631 control This instruction is not available on the S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 5 6 1 Double word multiplication and division Dx Expression Function FUN 042 Double word multiplication and division Inp
128. NS The contents of the user program and the register data can be stored in the flash memory They can be read into the main memory RAM by the initial load function or programmer operation Also the data registers D stored in the flash memory can be accessed from the user program Flash memory makes it possible to run without battery and recovery is easy in the event of a program being destroyed The following functions are available with EEPROM Function Details Conditions flash memory Program write into Writes the contents of the user program including the system information and the data registers D the timer registers T the counter registers C and the auxiliary relay registers RW in the main memory RAM into the flash memory Performed by the Program write RAM IC card EEPROM command from the programmer in the following state HALT mode Program read from flash memory Transfers the contents of the flash memory to the user program memory the data registers D the timer registers T the counter registers C and the auxiliary relay registers RW in the main memory RAM Performed by the Program read RAM lt IC card EEPROM command from the programmer in the following state HALT mode Initial load Transfers the contents of the flash memory to the user program memory and the leading 4 k words of the data registers D0000 to D4095 in the main memory
129. Nbs uoneiep ay mo sawed 0 1 9 u y seso s pue q 1 8 0067 v ulu Buluels s l uueued Buisn y 1 w erep 0 1 0 8 1 8 qida w 1 w FE did wiod Buneo 4 222 juiod Suneoli ay 40 uone nojeo qid eui mo samep a 1 8 u y sexos pue y 1 w 6 88Z trep 1urod Buneoy eur yo 1001 azenbs ou spur a 1 8 144 v 1 v 1001 e1enbs jurod Buneo 4 zz em y XO 1 0 ulu seris pue WON in 8 18 4417 r o aida 04060 H pueq peep jurod Buneo y 022 pueq peep eui yorum eyep jurod eui spuly 9 1 9 62 Y ul ynses eui sexos pue g 1 8 Buisn v L v 0 1 0 8 1 8 ma v y H Wu jewo ulod upeo 6LZ jurod Suneoli eui o yu 42m0 eui seiddy 9 1 9 92 v ul jnsei ay se1ojs pue g 1 8 Bursn v L v 0 1 0 8 1 8 TNS W 1 w H Wu jeddn juiod Bugeo giz suonouny eyep jurod Bureoj eui 0 yu saddn eui saiddy eeu sul p uinb i ol aun sd ls Areuuu ns uonejueseJdeH SueN N dnoio JequinN Nr suononuisu uonoun J suononuisu ureJ6eiq Jeppe 288 V series S2T 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION lnpoul eroeds y u HERE edar EA A A a A ESA L o a auum v H eyep einpow epeds gez Base JASN ay 0 ejnpouj eroeds USELZIZ
130. Next transfer load the program which has been written in the work file to the S2T First display the initial menu by pressing Esc Enter and then select T Load Save Compare Load Save Coapare P SIEHT Setup rtinns L Bnline UFEline F Workflier Disk Password D PLCO Disk Q Quit T AAA H 1 Select by using T or 111 kevs end press Enter kev Here select P PLC Work File from the lt Load Save Compare gt menu lt CToad Save Compare gt Setup Uptlons XPELCe Work 1le P PREMISE L Mml ne 0ffiine B Y Korkfile lisk i Passward L Load Kork PLC 3 PLE isk 8 Quit Compare PLC Work i Select by using ET or 1 keys and press Enterl kev PLUIE GO User s manual Functions 65 6 Programming Example PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING Then select L Load Work gt PLC from the PLC Work File menu T MATA D Setup Options Load Save Coopare gt Pl Load Nork PLO gt L nline Uffline P F WorkfiieoBisk H Password 11 Register deyice data D PLC Disk Q Quit D Comments A Ali i Lund T PUS SEND i 1 i F1 F F3 T4 ES Eb F7 P P Fi i Select by using Te 11 keys end press Enteri kev The selection menu for loading details is displayed Since it
131. O31 4 4 XW005 5 YVVO22 YW023 5 YVVO32 YW033 5 5 XW006 XW007 6 YWO24 YWO25 6 YWO34 YW035 6 6 XW008 XW009 7 7 YVVO36 YW037 7 7 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 4 VO Allocation 4 4 Network assignment TOSLINE S20 For the data transmission module TOSLINE S20 TOSLINE F10 the network assignment is necessary in addition to the 1 O allocation mentioned before The network assignment is the declaration of assignment between the link registers and the scan data memory in the data transmission module The TOSLINE S20 has 1024 words of scan data memory in the module By using the network assignment S2T s link registers W are assigned to the scan data memory in units of blocks 64 words block Here the block is not related to the data send block in the TOSLINE S20 The data transfer direction between the link registers and the scan data memory is determined by S2T CPU for each address according to the data send block setting in the TOSLINE S20 The following 3 types of assignment setting are available Setting Function Blank The block of link registers W are not assigned to TOSLINE S20 LINK The block of link registers W are assigned to TOSLINE S20 S2T accesses TOSLINE S20 for the block GLOBAL Used when 2 TOSLINE S20s are mounted on the S2T and when the S2T functions as bridge station for the 2 TOSLINE S20 networks Note Up to 2 TOSLINE S2Os can
132. ON The above procedure is called Offline mode programming In the Offline mode programming after the user program is developed without the S2T hardware it will be loaded into the S2T at a time User s manual Functions 17 1 Overview PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING On the other hand the method of connecting the programmer T PDS to the S2T and writing the program directly into the S2T is called Online mode programming The procedure of Online mode programming is as follows 1 Determination of I O v 2 Program Designing Y 3 Starting the T PDS Y 7 Starting up the S2T Y 8 Selecting Online Mode Set the T PDS to Online mode Y 9 Clearing Memory r Clear initialize the S2T s memory v I O Allocation r When all the necessary I O modules are mounted the Automatic I O Allocation function can be used Y Programming r Write the program directly into the S2T s memory 11 Program Debugging Y 12 Program Modification Y 13 Writing into the EEPROM 14 Normal Operation __ NOTE VAV 1 Take special care for Safety during program debugging and test run 2 If power is switched on when the RAM ROM switch is in RAM the S2T will not enter RUN mode automatically even if the Operation mode switch is in RUN See Section 2 2 1 8 V series S2T P
133. Processing The status of external input signals will be read from input modules and stored in the input registers The input register is sometimes called the input image table Batch Output Processing The status of output registers is written to the output modules The output module determines the ON OFF state of output based on this The output register is sometimes called the output image table amp User Program Execution The instructions stored in the user program memory are read one by one and the contents of the output register are updated while referring to the contents of the user data This is an essential function of the S2T One cycle from operation mode control to user program execution is called one scan The time required for 1 scan is called the scan cycle or the scan time Generally the shorter the scan cycle the faster the output response to a change in input signal MOIE VAV The important items related to the S2T operation mode and the switches are summarized below 1 When power is turned on with the RAM ROM switch at RAM position the S2T starts up in HALT mode Therefore use the RAM position during debug and test run and set to ROM in normal operation regardless of the type of the S2T CPU 2 The object of the Initial Load is whole program and the leading 4k words of data register D0000 to D4095 Therefore even if the range of D0000 to D4095 is specified as reten
134. Programming Example 3 Next carry out the I O allocation From the initial menu state select S System information Key in S erste Infection XSystem Information Program s Sa M Data Monitor E B LE Allocation Coments Event History Borwsentation e Usage Map Sampling Trace E 5 Scan Time T L Status Latch D System Diagnosis M Neaory Managenent fflinr t m mme wm O 11 L Control BES 1 5 1 i H i Select be asim EI um Revs and press Enter key i 1 Here select A I O allocation information Key in A i i lt System Informatlan 1 P Program IAI Allocations iP System Parameters 2 M Data Monitor Eme 4 BORME i iA EA C Comments I Interrupt ssigmeat Event History 3 Documentation N Network Assigomeat Scan Time U Usage Map E s T Sampiing Trace L Status Latch n System Diagnosis M Memory Management Uffline t untra 5 1 1 Then key in A to select A allocation U lt 1 0 Aliocation gt 1 i nit t ait 1 Unit K nit H3 Slot 10 Slot Lu Slot 1 0 Slot 1 0 PU 1 ec 1 at 1 i Bi 1 1t 1 11 1 21 1 z 1 zi 21 1 3I 3 I 31 1 3 1 al 41 41 1 a 1 5 5 5 5 i 1 8I 6 t 6 E fof 1 Ti 1 TOL 1 71 1 7 a 1 a 1
135. Quit U Usage Map 4 N ho i Y o vorkfFile create nev File 7 The programmer is now waiting for confirmation the creation of a work file Key in Y wer T PUS MOTE MESE Cru 5 System Informatian T Load Save Compare P Program 0 Setup Options M Data Monitor L HET E C Coments W Password H nrumrnfafl n D Quit i U Usage Map Select PLE type 1 i 2 T2 i oe ie User s manual Functions 49 6 Programming Example 50 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING Next the PLC model will be requested Select 6 T3H by keying in 1 System Information Program Data Monitor Comments Documentation Usage Passeerd T PBS INE SEAL i Load Save Compare Setup Options Quit The T PDS mode is changed to offline mode Offline C is displayed at the bottom left of the screen Since you are asked whether to record the settings select Y Yes By this means the next time the T PDS starts up it will start up with the work file in drive C as the target System Information Progras 8 P M D u Data Monitor Coments Documentation Usage Map Load Save Compare T DB Setup Options L V Password q Quit MEHZ T Select v using L I or t1 keys aml press Enter kev Ffline U PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6
136. S2T operation check by simulated inputs Carry out an operation check by combining with external devices the power circuit should be cut off Carry out system trial operation and adjustment Store the program on a disk file and make documentation User s manual Functions 15 1 Overview PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 1 2 Basic programming The basic procedures for creating a S2T program and loading the procedures program into the S2T are as follows 1 Determination of I O Y 2 Program Designing Y 3 Starting the T PDS Y 4 Selecting Offline Mode Y 5 I O Allocation 6 Programming Y 7 Start up the S2T Y 8 Selecting Online Mode 1 6 V series S2T Determine the types and arrangement of the I O modules and make an input output map for the external devices and the S2T s data memory Create the program based on the operation sequence of the system At this time give due consideration to constructing the program by dividing it into an input signal processing section a control condition section and an output section Also the program will follow the flow of control operation By this means the program should be easy to study and therefore modification and additions should be simple Start up the T series Programmer T PDS Set the T PDS to Offline mode and initialize t
137. The capacity limits of SFC programs are set out in the following Tables Be careful not to exceed these capacities e Overall Capacities Maximum numbers which can be programmed in the S2T Number of SFC main programs 64 063 Number of macro programs 128 0127 Number of SFC steps 4096 04095 Number of SFC labels 1024 01023 e Capacities per SFC Main Program Macro Program Number of SFC steps 128 Number of instruction steps SFC actions y and transition conditions total Number of simultaneous branches 5 SFC edit screen capacity 128 lines by 5 columns Capacities per Action Transition condition Action program capacity 121 steps Transition condition capacity 110 steps See 5 5 List of instructions for the required numbers of steps for SFC instructions and ladder diagram instructions 2 The starting and re setting of an SFC program is carried out by the SFC initialization instruction SFC instruction ladder diagram instruction SFC initialization makes the steps in a designated area inactive and makes the initial step active Therefore the area of the steps designated by SFC initialization the number of initialized steps includes all the step numbers which are used in that SFC program including macro programs as well Take care that step numbers used in other SFC programs are not involved For instance if the SFC initialization designation i
138. Therefore it is effective for program maintenance and standardization SFC program is composed of structure part which shows the flow of control action parts which show the operation of each step and transition condition parts which enable the process to advance Action parts and transition condition parts are produced by ladder diagram SFC can be considered as an execution control element for making a program easier to see by arranging the control processes and conditions rather than a single programming language SFC Structure Initial step Transition Divergence of simultaneous sequences 2 Bi Divergence of sequence selection Action part uu All TON H SET Fl z 0 End step The flow of control advances downward from the initial step and when it reaches the end step it returns to the initial step A step corresponds to an operational process and there is an action part corresponding to each step The condition of shifting from one step to the next is called transition and there is a transition condition corresponding to each transition When the immediately preceding step of a transition is in the active state and the transition condition is ON the state of the immediately preceding step is changed to inactive and the next step becomes active User s manual Functions 209 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 21 0 V series S2T The following Table shows
139. User Data The correspondence between register data and device data should be considered as follows Example When it is said that the content of XW005 is 100 since the decimal number 100 is expressed as 1100100 in binary notation this indicates that each of the bits of XW005 will be as follows MSB LSB FEDCBA98765 4 3 2 1 0 lt Bit position XW005 SE 1515115 6 X0056 is ON 1 At this time the data of device X0056 corresponding to bit position 6 of XW005 is 1 that is to say X0056 is ON The correspondence of registers and devices is shovvn by function types Input device X corresponds to 1 bit of input register XW Output device Y corresponds to 1 bit of output register YW Auxiliary device R T corresponds to 1 bit of auxiliary register RW Special device S corresponds to 1 bit of special register SW Link device 2 corresponds to 1 bit of link register W Link relay L TLLTETLL corresponds to 1 bit of link register LW The treatment of the other devices 1 O T and C is slightly different It is described in detail in Section 3 2 User s manual Functions 153 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION The following Table shows the types of registers and devices and their address ranges Their functions and methods of use are described in
140. W021 YW 006 YW007 XW016 XW017 XW018 XW019 YW008 YVVOO9 YW010 YWO11 XW012 XW013 XW014 XW015 2 In the case of expansion units allocations are given following on from the previous stage unit in sequence from the left end module to the right end module Register allocation table PUO 123456 7 A E 1 Lo Type Register Basic Ma a a es tit 0 0 FS Plolololalala a 2 0 o x 2w XW000 XW001 U VV VV VV VV VV VV VV V s 5 7 Y 2W YNO20 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 0 Y 2W XW022 XW023 Expansion P X X Y Y Y Y 1 X 2W XW024 XW025 1 F S 2 212 2 2 2 114 2 X 2W XW026 XW027 1 WIWIWIN WIN WW 3 X 2w XVVO28 XW029 4 Y 2W XW030 XW031 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 5 Y 2W XW032 XW033 Expansion P Y XIXIY Y XIX Y 6 Y ow XW034 82 lls F 212l21212121l212 7 Y 2W XW035 W VV VV VV VV VV VV VV 2 0 Y 2w XW036 XW037 S s In the I O allocation for convenience the module mounting position is expressed by a combination of the unit number and the slot number Unit number 0 1 2 3 in sequence from the basic unit Slot number 0 1 2 7 in sequence from the module mounting position at the left end User s manual Functions 27 3 VO Allocation PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 3 Slots in which no module is mounted in manual l O al
141. When mode is changed from HALT to DEBUG S2T enters this mode The execution condition setting of the DEBUG mode function is possible in this mode All outputs OFF Program execution mode When the stop condition is fulfilled in each DEBUG mode function the mode moves into D STOP Temporary stop mode The mode transition factor of D RUN to D STOP can be displayed on the programmer Output state remains User s manual Functions 121 5 RAS Functions PART 2 FUNCTIONS UO disable Trace back function Function details 1 22 V series S2T In the DEBUG mode I O module accessing can be disabled by the execution condition setting When I O disable is selected external input status is not read into the input devices registers X XW and the status of the output devices registers Y YW is not sent the output modules In this case operation modes displayed on the programmer are changed from D HALT to S HALT D RUN to S RUN and D STOP to S STOP respectively In the program execution of the DEBUG mode functions the online trace information of latest 10 scans is maintained This information can be monitored after the execution is stopped D STOP mode 1 This function is not available for the single step execution and the single rung execution 2 This function is available only for the program range currently monitored 1 Breakpoint setting function Program execution is stopped when the instruction which is set
142. al sub program function In the normal sub program function of Sub 2 Sub 3 and Sub 4 the execution mode can be selected either the one time mode or the cyclic mode NOTE VAV For the details of the sub program execution see Part 2 Section 3 2 Also for Sub 2 see Part 2 Section 5 5 2 Each sub program must be finished by the END instruction Although instructions may be present after the END instruction these instructions will not be executed However they count in the number of steps used PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Sub programs execution conditions are summarized in the table below 2 User Program Configuration Sub No Execution condition Sub 1 Sub 2 Executed once in the first scan before the main program execution except when S2T is in the hot restart mode S0400 1 and power recovery within 2s Special mode S0403 1 Executed once in the first scan before the main program execution when S2T is in the hot restart mode S0400 1 and power recovery within 2s One time model S0403 0 and S0405 0 Executed once when 0409 is changed from to 1 S0409 is reset to 0 automatically Cyclic mode S0403 0 and S0405 1 Executed once per every specified number of scans which is specified by SW042 during S0409 1 Sub 3 One time mode S0406 0 Executed once when S040A is changed from 0 to 1 S040A is reset to automatically Cyclic mode S0406 1 Execut
143. allocation The CPU determines input output register allocation based on this information Also as self diagnosis the CPU executes a check as to whether the modules in the allocation information are correctly mounted User s manual Functions 33 34 V series S2T 4 User Program PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 4 3 User program The user program is a group of instructions for executing control and has a capacity of 31 5k 63 5k steps The function which executes the user program is the main function of the programmable controller S2T The user program is stored by each program type as shown in the following diagram and it is managed by units called blocks in each program type Also in 1 block the user program is managed by a rung number in the case of ladder diagram Therefore in the monitoring editing the user program a specified rung can be called by designating the program type block number and rung number User Program Configuration Program Types Program Type Internal Block Internal Structure Structure Blocks Rung Numbers Rung 1 Main program H d HE Block 1 H O7 HH wie Soe n n n 4 l Sub program 1 DO ER eo a ye Ie 1 1 prd 4 Rung 2 Sub program 2 H Mov O Block 2 nm 1 1 ENDE e ni i Sub program 3 Rung 3 1 a A l 1 H i Block 3 Ly Sub program 4 eet Set e Be ie SA PENE AE AT A OA E x PT A dia T
144. am above when step 120 is active the action program power rail corresponding to step 120 becomes ON In this state when device becomes ON the transition conditions are satisfied and step 120 becomes inactive and step 121 becomes active In accompaniment to this the action program power rail corresponding to step 120 becomes OFF executed as power rail OFF and the action program power rail corresponding to step 121 becomes ON Overall configuration The following illustrates the overall configuration of an SFC Program SFC main program Macro program SFC initialization Macro entry NO0V a Initial step Macro number lt 100 M EE Label Macro step 20 Q10 pia Macro number 100 21 Step Simultaneous T sequences E Macro end Sequence selection Pd q 11 SFC end x 10 The overall SFC program can be considered as divided into an SFC main program and a macro program The SFC main program has an initial step in its structure and has an SFC end or an End step in its bottom Inthe S2T a maximum of 64 SFC main programs can be created User s manual Functions 21 9 5 Programming Language 220 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION On the other hand a macro program is a sub sequence which starts from macro entry and finishes at macro end Each macro program has its own mac
145. an The results are reflected in the special relay S0142 This function is enabled when the special relay S0140 is set to ON Device registered Bit pattern setting Present device maximum 8 maximum 16 patterns status X000 O e O X003 e O ves O e X015 X X lt gt e 2 Comparison Y08A Q X eem e Results Agrees with the setting pattern 0142 0 Dose not agree with the setting pattern 50142 1 In the pattern setting OFF is shown as O ON is shown as and do not care is shown as X The device and bit pattern registration takes place in programmer system diagnosis menu The checkpoint of this function can be selected by the special relay SO15F as below S015F OFF Before user program execution after I O processing S015F ON After user program execution User s manual Functions 129 5 RAS Functions PART 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Register value validity check function This function checks that the register value is within the specified numerical value range to 4 registers can be registered with the maximum and the minimum data Also it is possible to select the register value to be taken as an integer signed or as a positive integer unsigned The checkpoint can be selected either before program execution or end of scan The results are stored in the special relay S0143 S0146 within the range O outside the range 1 This function is enabled when th
146. ansferred to RW100 The XVVO05 data is not affected Codes Direct output registers OW Direct output devices O Addresses Direct input registers 000 511 correspond to output registers YW Direct input devices 0000 511F correspond to output devices Y Functions When instructions are executed using direct output registers direct output devices data is stored in the corresponding output registers output devices YW Y Then this output register YW data is written directly to the corresponding output module These registers devices are used when using the S2T as the direct input output system direct system and not the batch input output system refresh system Example O0020 Coil 00020 When the instruction is executed the data ON OFF data corresponding to the left link state is stored in YOO20 Then the 16 bit data of YW002 is written to the corresponding output module Codes Auxiliary registers RW Auxiliary devices R Addresses Output registers 000 999 1000 words Output devices 0000 999F corresponding to one bit in a register 16000 points Functions These are general purpose registers devices which can be used for temporary storage of execution results in a program An auxiliary register is used for storing 16 bit data An auxiliary device indicates 1 bit in an auxiliary register Auxiliary registers devices ca
147. ansmission error Bit 7 indicates the error is occurred HOC I O no answer error whether self station or target station HOD expand memory designation error 0 Self station HOE Reserve 1 Target station HOF Reserve Transmission error When TermSTS is HOB the error information is stored 0 for other cases information For detailed information refer to the S20LP or EN311 manual Example R0030 1 RECV RWOG6O0 RWO30 3 1 0 Ethernet channel 1 RWO31 33 H21 Request command H21 Register read write RW032 200 Transfer size 200 words RW033 5 Self station F register RW034 5000 Leading address F5000 RW035 4 Target station D register RW036 4000 Leading address D4000 RW037 50 Response time limit 5 second RW038 H62 HOA Target station IP address RW039 H85 H71 133 113 98 10 H85 H71 H62 H0A RWO40 1024 Target station UDP port No 1024 m Send requesting RWO60 00 11 0 RW061 0 User s manual Functions 265 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION S2T self station F5000 F5001 F5199 IP address 133 113 98 10 S2T target station D4000 D4001 p4 99 When R0030 is ON 200 words data starting with D4000 of the S2T on which EN611 EN631 IP address 133 113 98 10 is installed is read and stored in F5000 and after When the operation is completed the statu
148. anual allocation is also used for offline mode programming When the UO allocation information is stored in the S2T memory by these methods the correspondence between the I O modules and the I O register is automatically determined by the rules described in Section 3 3 In practice special allocation of module types other than those shown in the table on the next page can be executed by manual I O allocation However the description is omitted here The details are described in Part 3 PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 3 VO Allocation The module type of I O module is expressed in the following table by a combination of a functional classification X Input Y Output X Y I O mixed and the number of registers occupied W DI632D 652 8 points DC input X 1W DI633 16 points DC input X 1W DI634 32 points DC input X 2W IN653 663 16 points AC input X 1W DO633 633P 653 16 points DC output Y 1W DO634 32 points DC output Y 2W Yaw AC663 16 points AC output Y 1W RO663 16 points Relay output Y 2W RO662S 8 points Relay output isolated Y 1W AD624L 634L AD624 634 4 channels analog input X 4W RT614 AD668 TC618 8 channels analog input X 8VV 557 4 channels analog output Y 4W DA664 4 channels analog output Y 4W CF611 ASCII module iX Y AW SN621 622 625 626 627 TOSLINE S20 data transmission TL S UM611 612 TOSLINE F10 data transmission TL F 3 2 Input and output In the previous Section UO allocati
149. arameters model type memory capacity 2 User program information program ID system comments number of steps used etc 3 Execution control parameters scanning mode sub program and interrupt program execution conditions 4 Retentive memory area information 5 1 O allocation information 6 I O interrupt assignment information 7 Network assignment information 8 Computer link parameters 9 System diagnosis function execution conditions Out of these the CPU automatically performs the setting updating of the machine parameters of 1 and the number of steps used of 2 Items apart from these are set by the user from the programmer Here only the retentive memory area information of 4 and the I O allocation information of 5 are described The other items are described in Part 2 and Part 3 Retentive memory area The ranges for retaining the data during power off can be set for the auxiliary register RW the timer register T the counter register C and the data register D Data other than within these set ranges will be 0 cleared device is OFF in the data initialization process at power up This setting is performed in a way to designate from the first address 0 to a designated address for each of the above registers See Section 5 2 for details UO allocation information As described in Section 3 I O allocation information is stored here by executing automatic allocation or manual I O
150. as the breakpoint is fetched The breakpoint can be set on one location only This function becomes available when any number except 0 is set in the Breakpoint counts in the execution condition setting When the breakpoint is fetched specified times the program execution is stopped The start of execution can be selected from the initial start and the continue start Initial startTTTTTTTTTTI User data initialization is performed then program execution is started from the top Continue start TTT Program execution is started from the point where the execution was stopped last time When execution is started from the D HALT mode the initial start is selected automatically PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 RAS Functions Execution example 1 Initial start l s Breakpoint Execution example 2 Continue start Last time stopped point Breakpoint 2 Single step execution function The execution is started and stopped in units of one instruction User data initialization is performed Then program execution is started from the top and stopped at the breakpoint The breakpoint instruction is not executed Execution is started from the point of last time stopped and stopped at the breakpoint When this function is activated from the D HALT mode the user data initialization is performed and the program execution is stopped at the top instruction D RUN gt D STOP When this f
151. ased gt MV MV AMV Gap dead band operation Error e Algorithm Digital filter PV 1 FT PVC FT PV Here 0 1 User s manual Functions 249 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION PID algorithm AMV Kp AP Al AD MV MV AMV Here AP 6 En e SV PV If GP Gap is applied At Ir Al 0 AD Tp PV 4 PVa At Daa Dr At n TD AD n 0 1 Fixed Parameter details A 1 A Process input value PVC 0 to 100 56 Data range 0 0 to 100 0 A 3 A 2 Auto mode set value ASV 0 to 100 96 Data range 0 0 to 100 0 A 5 A 4 Cascade mode set value CSV 0 to 100 96 Data range 0 0 to 100 0 A 7 A 6 Manual mode MV MMV 25 to 125 96 Data range 25 0 to 125 0 A 9 A 8 MV tracking input TMV 25 to 125 Data range 25 0 to 125 0 A 11 A 10 Mode setting MODE A11 A10 F 0 F C 8 4 0 A Operation mode 00 Manual mode 01 Auto mode 10 Cascade mode 11 Reserve Tracking designation 0 No 1 Yes B 1 B Proportional gain K 0 to 327 67 Data range 0 0 to 327 67 B 3 B 2 Integral time T 0 to 32 767 min stop if T 0 Data range 0 0 to 32 767 B 5 B 4 Derivative time Tp to 32 767 min Data range 0 0 to 32 767 B 7 B 6 Gap dead band GP 0 to 10 96 Data range 0 0 to 10 0 B 9 B 8 Auto mode initial set value ISV 0to 100 Data
152. ation 260 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language Inside the parameter cont d Status S20LP Ethernet Abn Normal complete Error complete Initial state Transmission port busy Busy Status Initial state While send requesting While waiting response 3 Complete AR Ol 61 6o TermSTS HOO Normal complete H01 Register designation error H02 Response time out HO3 Parameter error H04 Register write protect HO5 Reserve H06 Module error send time out H07 No send channel 08 Invalid station No HO9 Transfer size error HOA Boundary error SEES HOB Transmission error Bit 7 indicates the error is occurred HOC I O no answer error whether self station or target station HOD expand memory designation error 0 Self station HOE Reserve 1 Target station HOF Reserve Transmission error When TermSTS is HOB the error information is stored 0 for other cases information For detailed information refer to the S20LP or EN311 manual Example R0020 1 H Rv010 SEND RWO5O RW010 2 1 3 S20LP channel 1 target station No is 3 RW011 0 RW012 128 Transfer size 128 words RW013 3 Self station RW register RW014 100 Leading address RW100 RW015 4 Target station D register RW016 1000 Leading address D1000 RW017 10 Response time limit 1 second
153. ation This is the method by which the user edits the I O allocation information on the I O allocation information screen of the programmer T PDS and writes it to the S2T The manual UO allocation is used in the following cases e When carrying out programming in a state in which the I O modules are not fully mounted When it is desired to remove some modules from the subjects of batch input output processing When using the unit base address setting function e When allocating a specified number of registers to slot left vacant for future addition e When carrying out offline programming For manual I O allocation module types are set for each slot The module types which can be set at this time are as shown below Module types are expressed by combinations of function classifications and numbers of registers occupied except for TL S and TL F 7 X 01 02 04 08 Input batch input output Y 01 02 04 08 Output batch input output X Y 02 04 O8 Input output batch input output iX 01 02 04 08 Input out of batch input output iY 01 02 04 08 Output out of batch input output iX Y 02 04 08 Input output out of batch input output Z 08 16 32 SP 01 02 04 08 Space TL S For TOSLINE S20 TL F EE For TOSLINE F10 1 Allocations to input output modules are X and iX to input modules Y and Y to output modules and X Y and iX Y to input output mixe
154. be mounted on a S2T In this case the TOSLINE S20 nearer to the S2T CPU is regarded as CH1 and the other is CH2 User s manual Functions 203 4 VO Allocation PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 1 Example when 1 TOSLINE 30 is mounted CH1 only e Network assignment example Block Corresponding link registers CH1 CH2 1 W0000 W0063 LINK 2 W0064 W0127 LINK S W0128 W0191 LINK 4 W0192 W0255 5 W0256 W0319 6 W0320 W0383 7 W0384 W0447 8 W0448 W0511 9 W0512 W0575 LINK 10 W0576 W0639 LINK 11 W0640 W0703 12 W0704 W0767 13 W0768 W0831 14 W0832 W0895 15 W0896 W0959 16 W0960 W1023 e Data transfer direction Link register Data transfer direction CH1 scan data W0000 0 us T t 3 W0149 110700 149 W0150 150 lt t W0191 191 W0192 192 N no transfer A MOB L s 511 VV0512 512 3 N gt W0639 eee 639 W0640 640 no transfer VV102 3 1023 204 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 4 VO Allocation 2 Example when 2 TOSLINE S20 are mounted CH1 CH2 Regarding the network assignment the W register is divided into 32 blocks 64 words per one block The S20 has 1024 words of scan memory In case of the S2T even if two 320 s are used the scan memory of each S20 can be fully mapped
155. c 0 5 sec OFF 0 5 sec ON Cycle 1 0 sec 4 0 sec OFF 4 0 sec ON Cycle 8 0 sec All OFF when RUN starts up S0048 S0049 S004A S004B S004C S004D S004E Always OFF Reserve for future use Always OFF S004F Always ON Always ON S0050 S0051 S0052 S0053 S0055 S0054 S0056 S0057 S0058 S0059 S005A S005B S005C S005D S005E S005F CF carry flag ERF Error flag Used by instructions with carry ON through error occurrence when executing instructions linked with each error flag of SVV006 Reserve for future use This area except for S0050 S0051 is for reference only Writing is ineffective User s manual Functions 163 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Special Name Function device S0060 Illegal instruction detection Down ON when illegal instruction detected S0061 S0062 Reserve for future use S0063 S0064 Boundary error Warning ON When address range exceeded by indirect address designation operation continues S0065 Address boundary error Warning ON when destination indirect error by CALL instruction or JUMP instruction operation continues S0066 Reserve for future use 0067 S0068 Division error Warning ON when error occurs by di
156. ca 622 eV u jjnseJ ay se1ojs pue y Jo sjuajuoo eut o g 10 a o v Aueo vun S Jo sjuejuoo ay pue Bey Aug ay sjue1uoo eui sppy Z D 9 ul jepureuiei z S8 6 6 y ayi pue 9 1 9 ur 1u nonb ay soos pue g 1 8 O 9 8 1 8 a v v J UOlSIAIP l v r lqnoq pe Jo sjuajuoo eui Aq v L v jo slu luo2 eui sepia 9 9 2 9 9 E 229 ER ul ynses y sajojs pue g Lie 0 1 0 8 1 8 a v iHv uone ndnnu ui amp uer ejqnog 66 suoneodo Jo sjuajuoo eui q y 1 y JO siue1u09 y s lldiliniy oneuuuv sul peuinbo4 aun sd ls seuwuIns uolyejuasaiday SUEN Gen dnog uOnnoex3 Jo JequINN suononuisu uonounJ suomnonuisu urej6erq 19ppe7 User s manual Functions 271 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language ES 6st pue ME abo ee 57 O Oaa Nad el il E A ST OX JON c id rer Lt E E ax fo PS dci ad a una v I HO anenee JON tS 269 6 y Bi 000 Gas L 0 1 to 1 9 uoaq viv H ansnpoxo ubuereanod es y r Zey a ada apa o lt a uoa v HO 29 269 6 y bu salla Es 7 susp LO ECO a 1 8 Yoa v v HO ujbuereiqnod 19 vev Lev 9 ul pue g pue y yo HO 129 60 ay spuly g uo v HO 0S 269 pt pue ete pue
157. cks that response when Error registration error down check I O module is accessed is However when start up is within specified response time activated by a command from the limits programmer a message will be displayed lt remain in HALT mode and no error registration will take place Program check User program syntax is Error registration error down checked However when start up is activated by a command from the programmer a message will be displayed lt remain in HALT mode and no error registration will take place User s manual Functions 107 5 RAS Functions 1 08 V series S2T 3 Diagnosis during scan PART 2 FUNCTIONS Items Diagnostics details Behavior when error detected bus check Checks that I O bus is normal at batch I O processing Error registration then error down However if recovered by retries only registration will take place no error down Expansion unit power check Checks that power of expansion units is normal at batch I O processing Error registration then error down However if recovered by retries only registration will take place no error down I O response check 1 O bus parity check Checks that response when I O module is accessed is within specified response time limits At batch I O processing and at direct I O instruction Bus parity is checked when the I O module is accessed At ba
158. creen on T PDS Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 22 Unit 23 Top Register No Top Register No Top Register No Top Register No 0 15 35 50 In the case of this screen example address allocations can be carried out from XW YW000 for the basic unit from XW YW015 for expansion unit 1 from XVV YVVO35 for expansion unit 2 from XW YWOD5O0 for expansion unit 3 NOTE VAV Settings by which latter stage units become lower register addresses cannot be made PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 4 VO Allocation 4 3 Register and module When UO allocation information is registered by carrying out automatic correspondence allocation or manual I O allocation correspondence between registers and modules is automatically determined by the following rules 1 In any unit allocation is the lower address registers are allocated in sequence from the module at the left end 2 In a case when the unit base addr ess is not set it is not set by automatic I O allocation the registers are allocated in continuation from the previous stage unit 3 A slot for which a module type is not set any vacant slot in automatic I O allocation is the same does not occupy any registers 4 The cases of the half size racks also are handled in the same way as standard size rack for UO allocation and they are regarded as having slots without settings in the latter portions of the unit Therefore these portions do not occupy reg
159. ctly designating the register address as shown in Example 1 below is called direct addressing As opposed to this the method of indirectly designating the register by combination with the contents of the index registers J K as shown in Example 2 below is called the indirect addressing In particular in this case since the address is modified using an index register this is called index modification Example 1 Rw100 MOV D3500 Data transfer instruction Transfer content of RW100 to D3500 Example 2 RVV100 MOV D3500 Data transfer instruction index modification attached Transfer content of RW 100 to D 3500 J If 1 3 and J2200 the content of RVV103 is transferred to D3700 There are 3 types of index register J and K Each type processes 16 bit integers 32768 to 32767 There are no particular differences in function between these 3 types of index register There is no special instruction for substituting values in these index registers There are designated as destination for normal instructions Example 1 Substituting a constant in an index register 64 MOV T Substitute 64 in index register 1 2 MOV J E Substitute 2 in index register J Example 2 Substituting register data in an index register D0035 MOV K Substitute the value of D0035 in index register K RVV078 MOV Substitute the value of RW078 in index register 1 User s manual
160. d codes Input registers XW Input devices Input devices X Addresses Input registers 000 511 512 words Common use as output Input devices 0000 511F 8192 points registers output devices Functions These are allocated in the input module as register units word units by performing input output allocation The signal state inputted to the input module is stored in the corresponding input register by batch input output timing except for modules which have the designation attached when allocating An input device expresses 1 bit of the corresponding input register The data of input register input devices basically do not change during 1 scan However when executing a direct I O instruction FLJN235 data is read from the corresponding input module when the instruction is executed and is stored in an input register input device XW X Thus the data changes during the scan Output registers and codes Output registers YW Output devices Output devices Y Addresses Output registers 000 511 512 words Common use as input Output devices 0000 511F 8192 points registers input devices Functions These are allocated in the output module as register units word units by performing input output allocation The data stored in the output register is written to the corresponding output module by batch input output timing and the state of the output signal of the o
161. d modules The input output registers which correspond to modules with the designation i attached are not included in batch input output subjects 2 SP is used when allocating an arbitrary number of registers to a vacant slot 3 TL S is allocated to data transmission module TOSLINE S20 4 TL F is allocated to data transmission module TOSLINE F10 5 Z is not used in the S2T User s manual Functions 199 4 VO Allocation PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Unit base address setting function 200 V series S2T MOIE VAV The 1 O allocation information can be freely edited and registered by carrying out manual I O allocation However it is necessary that the registered input output allocation information and the 1 O module mounting state should agree for starting up RUN When executing the forced RUN command operation RUN F mode is possible even if the modules registered in the allocation information are not mounted However in this case also operation cannot be executed when a module of a different type to the registered module is mounted I O mismatch In manual I O allocation the starting register address input output registers of each unit can be set The register addresses can be arranged for each unit by using this function Also when an l O module is added in a vacant slot in the future it is possible to avoid affecting the register addresses of other units Unit base address setting s
162. d by interrupt signals generated by I O modules with the interrupt function The coordination between the interrupt program numbers and the UO modules with interrupt function can be changed by the interrupt assignment function Each interrupt program must be finished by the IRET instruction MOIE VAV 1 For details of interrupt program operation see Part 2 Section 3 3 2 SFC cannot be used in the interrupt program The following modules are available as the module with the interrupt function interrupt I O e 2channels pulse input Part No PI632 672 allocation type X Y2W When automatic I O allocation is carried out in the state with interrupt UO mounted for coordination between the interrupt program number and the interrupt I O the lower number I O interrupt programs are allocated in sequence from the interrupt I O closest to the CPU See the example on the following page PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Example 2 User Program Configuration 1 Module mounting status Interrupt I O 1 ae Interrupt I O 2 5 Interrupt I O 3 PU 0142 3 6 7 Basic PI CI Iili X X Y Y Y i unit 0 s pP X X X l F U Y Y Y 212121212121212 VV VV VVIVV VV VV VV VV 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 Expansion P X Y mit 1 S 5 8 S S 5 F S S SS gt gt 4 4 41 4 gt gt gt WIWINIW 2 Register allocation
163. devices are locations which store 1 bit data ON OFF information their functions The following types are available according to Code Name Function Number Address Range Input device Stores input data from the input module batch input Corresponds to 1 bit in the XW register Output device Stores output data to the output module batch output Corresponds to 1 bit in the YW register Direct input device Direct input data from the input module direct input Direct output device Direct output data to the output module direct output Total 8192 points X0000 X511F Y0000 Y511F 10000 1511F O000 O511F Auxiliary relay device Used for internal relay Corresponds to 1 bit in the RW register 16000 points R000 R999F Special device Stores error flags execution control flags timing relays etc Corresponds to 1 bit in the SW register 4096 points S0000 S255F Timer relay device Reflects the execution result of the timer instruction Corresponds to the T register operation of the same address 1000 points T 000 T 999 Counter relay device Reflects the execution result of the counter instruction Corresponds to the C register operation of the same address 512 points C 000 C 511 Link device Data exchange area with data transmission module TOSLINE S20 Corresponds to 1 bit in the leading 512 words of the W regis
164. ding to a certain transition that transition condition is always regarded as true Dummy transition In programming by designating the transition on the SFC screen and selecting the detail display mode the monitor edit screen for the transition condition corresponding to that transition will appear In the case when the content of the transition condition is only 1 instruction of NO contact or NC contact direct editing can be carried out without putting up the detail display screen See the programmer T PDS operation manual in a separate volume for this operation NOTE VAV The following execution control instructions cannot be used in action programs and transition conditions e Jump JSC JCR JUMP LBL e Master control MCS MCR MCSn MCRn e End END e FOR NEXT FOR NEXT Also the invert contact and various coil instructions cannot be used in transition conditions 228 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language Execution system The following shows the concept of the execution system in one SFC program 1 In one scan evaluation of the transition condition the step transition processing and the execution of the action program are sequentially operated Evaluation of the transition condition means the execution of the transition condition connected to an active step and carrying out a check for transition condition establishment At this time since evaluation is made only
165. ds setting value and timer register Key in 10 Enter T64 Enter If you make a mistake cancel it with the Space key and re input i wena TON rose li 4 User s manual Functions 57 6 Programming Example PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING Next input the NC contact of X010 with vertical connection Key in Kam FS 1 X10 Enter xe 188818 TON wot BM Write idee Her ER D C M NUI E Complete the 1st rung using the same procedure as follows Key in T RO Enter RO Enter 4 X11 Enter Enter F1 F2 4 F4 F4 deii KH Foi iHe TON 0641 DES ae XEM M 4 T qup AA E Ee E Ki g d n di NN 2001 Ed i t pre d Lin EDITI Hex EN 3 7 i8 Next move to the head of the 2nd rung using the cursor keys and input the 2nd rung using the same procedure as for the 1st rung Then input the 3rd and 4th rungs 58 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 Programming Example While doing this when an instruction for which the symbol is not displayed on the command line such as a transitional contact display the Menu Window by pressing Shift F2 Seq Inst and then select Screen state when Shift F2 Seq Inst has been pressed KU appia TON Top i RARAS X8811 i pn pap RHOH3 XNTE per y l il
166. duioo sz 281 voL 9 8 1 8 ul v 1 v Jo anea einjosqe eui seois 8 1 8 sava w 1 w ainjosqe 181 SG 8 9 6 8 u v jo enjea einjosqe ay salo s a sav v anea einioSQV 08L vosienuoo sn p nb ol aun sd ls tewuns uonejueseJdeH SueN N dnoio JequinN Nr suononuisu uonoun J suononuisu ureJ6eiq Jeppe 286 V series S2T 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION jnseJ uonejedo eui o Buipyoooe seBueyo bey Aueo ay 2 L 9 o ulu 5 6 y q dd ua L 0 e oa aoa ubu aioa E Bey Kueo ay sjuejuoo y snid g 1 q sioenqns jjnseJ uonejedo ay o Buipioooe seBueuo Bey Kueo eu 9 1 9 AHE UHA Zett ul 1115 eu seJois pue 408 U v L v o1 Bey Areo Ho t 0 g i g oraq v Hv H uonippe qog ul v r yqnoq 202 y sjuajuoo v snid g g jo sjuajuoo eui sppy uoneJedo y o Buipioooe sebueyo 9109 Zey Del ureo eu 5 l ns 1 eui sasojs pue 0108 ul v o a v a v ureo uim uoyoenqns qog LOZ wou Bej ueo y Jo sjuejuoo ay snid g sioeuqng nee uoneJedo eui o Buipioooe sebueyo S 09 Zey Auro eu 9 ul ynsa ey sexos pue qog a o a v Areo uu uonippe aog 002 u
167. dware of the Programmable Controller S2T This manual also provides the necessary information for designing application programs and operating the S2T Read this manual carefully to use the S2T with it s maximum performance This manual is divided into the following 3 Parts Part 1 Basic Programming Gives the basic information for programming and shows how to write a program into the S2T with a simple example Part 2 Functions For the full understanding of the S2T functions first explains the internal operation of the S2T CPU and then explains the detailed functions of the S2T Part 3 Programming Information Explains the information for designing a program which will fully use the functions of the S2T Also explains Ladder diagram and SFC as programming languages forthe S2T Explains in the detailed information summarized in Part 1 Those who are using the S2T for the first time should first read Part 1 in order to understand the basics of programming When Parts 2 and 3 are read in addition the advanced control functions of the S2T will be understood without difficulty Those experienced in using the S2T may skip Part 1 but refer to Parts 2 and 3 as necessary so as to fully use performance An index is provided at the end of this manual for that purpose When it comes to the configuration some of the contents of Parts 1 and 3 are duplicated However please note that some
168. e following diagram Y I Latest input data incorporated in XW Batch I O processing YW data output externally Y YW data updated with reference to Running user program XW data 1 Basically this has the advantage that high speed scanning is achieved because the S2T CPU does not access to the l O modules during user program execution Also it is easy to create program logic because the XW data are not changed during user program execution This method is called the batch I O processing method refresh method There is also another method of S2T operation whereby I O module data exchange takes place during user program execution using IW I instead of XW X and OW O instead of YW Y This method is called the direct I O processing method t is recommended that the I O modules used in direct I O are inhibited from batch I O they have i specification on I O allocation to shorten the time for batch processing NOTE VAV Input XW T Output YW TI Link W LW allocation module registers 1 Use the following criteria for batch UO processing time 2 UO modules with i designation on I O allocation iX iY iX Y are not part of batch I O processing Refer to Part 3 for I O 3 Forced input devices X link register devices Z and link relays L are not part of batch I O processing The force function is explained in section 5 11 1 4 Refer to the data tran
169. e minimum value 1 ms units Sub program execution time Sub 1 4 current value maximum value minimum value 1 ms units Timer interrupt execution time latest value maximum value minimum value 0 1 ms units UO interrupt execution time I O 81 28 latest value maximum value minimum value 0 1 ms units NOTE VAV 1 The scan cycle value includes the scan overhead and all interrupts occurring during the scan 2 With the main program and the sub program execution times the interrupt time for any interrupts occurring are excluded 2 Online trace function This function traces the status during program execution and displays on the programmer screen power flow display register value display Since this displays data from the paint in time that the instruction is executed rather than at the end of a scan cycle it is useful for program debugging User s manual Functions 11 3 5 RAS Functions PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 6 Sampling trace function Sampling buffer Sampling target 1 1 4 V series S2T The sampling trace function collects the status of specified registers devices and stores it into the sampling buffer according to the specified sampling condition The collected data can be displayed on the programmer screen in the format of trend graph for registers or timing chart for devices The sampling trace function is useful for program debugging and troubleshooting Expand memor
170. e when automatic I O allocation is executed with the I O module mounting state shown below the CPU reads the I O module types which are mounted and creates l O allocation information and it registers it in system information Module mounting state PUO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot No Basic P C s 5 5 5151515 unit 0 S P ele e les lu Fl u e s s 2 9 glo ool el ol ol ol e CN O O O O N A 0 C C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Expansion unit 1 P zz zz unit 1 qs s 3100 8 F Ce aes pes ole 5332923435 01 23456 7 Expansion unit 42 P 2 Ei B Ei 2 unit 2 e Se asis el F Siglglglglglglela zrioclololololololio cO O CO O N N N GN cC C 01 23456 7 Expansion unit 3 P 2 2 2 unit 3 S S l3l3l3ls salsas F o o o o O OJO O 0 Saxaass sss cO O cO allocation information Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 s s s s H Module type Module type Module type E Module type t t t t PU 0 X 4W 0 Y 1W 0 Y AW 0 X 2W 1 X AW 1 Y AW 1 Y AW 1 X 1W 2 X AW 2 Y AW 2 Y AW 2 1W 3 3 Y 1W 3 3 1W 4 4 Y 2W 4 4 1W 5 Y 2W 5 Y 2W 5 5 X 2W 6 Y 2W 6 Y 2W 6 6 X 2W 7 7 Y 2W 7 7 TL F 1 98 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 4 VO Allocation Manual VO alloc
171. e special relay S0140 is set to ON Registered register Y Present Type Minimum value Maximum value maximum 4 register value XW034 Unsigned 0 400 200 XW035 Signed 1500 1500 2000 D0011 Unsigned H0200 H9000 Comparison H1234 W0100 Signed 300 600 1000 Results Register 1 XW034 S0143 0 XVV035 0144 1 D0011 50145 0 VV0100 0146 1 Register 2 Register 3 Register 4 The register and the numerical value range are registered in programmer system diagnosis menu The checkpoint of this function can be selected by the special relay SO15F as below S015F OFF Before user program execution after 1 O processing S015F ON After user program execution 1 30 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 RAS Functions 4 Sequence time over detection function The alarm step is provided for one of SFC sequential function chart instructions This Alarm step turns ON the specified device when the following transition is not come true within the preset time This function allows easy detection of operation hold ups in sequential control process SFC structure Ze m Action part Transition conditions part 120 Processing completed 121 Work transport Transport completed Alarm step monitor timer TOO3 monitor time 10 seconds alarm device R1000 Work processing With the above example if the transport has not been com
172. ed 2 SFC cannot be used in a sub routine 8 Other sub routines can be called from a sub routine nesting up to 6 layers 4 Since the operation will become abnormal in cases such as calling the same sub routine during the execution of a sub routine take care that the cases do not occur Comments can be added and stored in the S2T s user program memory By this means the user program becomes easier to understand The types of comments which can be stored in the S2T are tags comments for registers devices and SFC steps Tag TH up to 5 characters Comment TT up to 20 characters The comments storage capacity is the rest of the program size setting out of total 32k 64k steps The maximum storage number of comments tag and comment paired is calculated as follows 1024 x 32 or 64 N 38 10 Program size setting assigned to the user program NOTE VAV Here the comments which can be stored in the S2T are explained Comments can also be saved in a disk file For the disk file usage see separate manual for the programmer T PDS User s manual Functions 151 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 1 Overview 1 52 V series S2T The area which stores the external input output data current values of timers and counters and the values of the variables for data processing is called the user data For user data the storage location of the data is expre
173. ed the special relay is set and running is continued 1 Diagnosis at system initialization when power supply is turned on Items Diagnostics details Behavior when error detected System ROM The correctness of the system Error registration takes place BCC check ROM is checked by BCC FAULT and I O LED flash Programmer communication impossible System RAM The system RAM read write is Error registration takes place the check checked FAULT LED flashes Programmer communication impossible Peripheral LSI check Peripheral LSI is checked for normal initialization Read back check Error registration takes place the FAULT LED flashes the I O LED lights up Programmer communication impossible LP check LP language processor is checked for normal initialization Error registration takes place ERROR mode is entered Error reset command invalid User program memory check The correctness of the content of the user program memory is checked by BCC Checked after initial load when peripheral memory is present Error registration takes place ERROR mode is entered User data memory check The user data memory read write is checked Error registration takes place ERROR mode is entered Error reset command invalid PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 RAS Functions Peripheral The correctness of the Error registration takes place memory check peripheral memory
174. ed normally SVV130 W0032 W0047 SW131 W0048 W0063 e The lowest address of W register corresponds SW132 VV0064 W0079 to bit 0 in the SVV register and in the order SVV133 W0080 VVOO95 SW134 W0096 VV0111 SW135 TOSLINE S20 VV0112 W0127 SVV136 scan healthy map W0128 VV0143 SW137 VV0144 W0159 SVV138 VV0160 W0175 SW139 VV0176 W0191 SW140 VV0192 W0207 SW141 W0208 W0223 SW142 W0224 W0239 SW143 W0240 W0255 User s manual Functions 175 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Name Function SW144 W0256 W0271 The corresponding bit is ON when the W SW145 VV0272 W0278 register is updated normally SVV146 W0288 W0303 SW147 W0304 W0319 e The lowest address of W register corresponds SW148 W0320 W0335 to bit O in the SW register and in the order SW149 W0336 W0351 SW150 W0352 W0367 SW151 W0368 W0383 SW152 W0384 W0399 SW153 W0400 W0415 SW154 W0416 W0431 SW155 W0432 W0447 SW156 W0448 W0463 SW157 W0464 W0479 SW158 W0480 W0495 SW159 TOSLINE S20 W0496 W0511 sw160 scan healthy map W0512 W0527 SW161 W0528 W0543 SW162 W0544 W0559 SW163 W0560 W0575 SW164 W0576 W0591 SW165 W0592 W0607 SW166 W0608 W0623 SW167 W0624 W0639 SW16
175. ed once per every specified number of scans which is specified by SW043 during S040A 1 Sub 4 One time mode S0407 0 Executed once when S040B is changed from 0 to 1 S040B is reset to O automatically Cyclic mode S0407 1 Executed once per every specified number of scans which is specified by SW044 during S040B 1 NOTE VAV I O The sub program execution may be time sliced by scan Therefore to prevent the unexpected status changes of I O registers XW YW used in the sub program it is recommended to use the batch I O inhibition with i allocation and the direct I O instruction User s manual Functions 145 2 User Program Configuration PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 2 3 3 Interrupt program 1 46 V series S2T There are a total of 9 types of interrupt program These are 1 timer interrupt program which is executed cyclically with a cycle which is set in system information and 8 I O interrupt programs 1 8 which are started by interrupt signals from I O modules with interrupt function e Timer interrupt program This is executed cyclically with a cycle of 1 1000 ms which is registered in system information When no cycle is registered blank it is not executed Set the interval setting of the timer interrupt with 1 ms units in item 16 of the T PDS system information screen For details see T PDS operation manuals 1 O interrupt programs 1 8 These are starte
176. een the interrupt UO and the interrupt program No can be changed However the interrupt level priority is fixed as the hardware interrupt I O mounted closer to the CPU has higher interrupt priority The interrupt priority cannot be changed 1 48 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 2 User Program Configuration 2 3 4 Sub routines When it is necessary to execute repetitions of the same process in a program this process can be registered as a sub routine This sub routine can be executed by calling it at the required location By this means the number of program steps can be reduced and at the same time the program becomes easier to see since the functions have been put in order Sub routines can be called from other program types main program sub programs interrupt programs and from other sub routines they can also be called from the action part of SFC The sub routine should be located in the program type Sub routine and started by SUBR instruction and finished by RET instruction Up to 256 sub routines can be programmed It is necessary to assign a sub routine number to the SUBR instruction sub routine entry instruction The effective numbers are from 0 to 255 SUBR Ge E Sub routine number The RET instruction sub routine return instruction has no sub routine number The instruction which calls a registered sub routine is the CALL instruction sub routine call instruc
177. eral LSI setting status is checked Error registration and then error down Error reset command invalid Watchdog timer check Watchdog timer system runaway check Set at 350 ms Error registration and transition to ERROR mode after system reset User memory check User memory RAM read write checked Error down after error registration with retry LP check LP language processor Error registration and then error read write is checked down Battery check Memory backup battery Alarm RTC LSI check voltage checked Date and time data read from RTC LSI every 300ms validity checked data set in special register Alarm Until reset date and time data are HFF MOIE VAV Refer to the separate S2T User s Manual Hardware for details of troubleshooting User s manual Functions 109 5 RAS Functions PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 3 Event history 1 1 0 V series S2T When an error is detected by the S2T diagnosis the details and time of occurrence will be registered in the event history table besides errors the times power ON OFF are also registered The 30 most recent occurrences of errors can be registered in the event history table As new data is registered the data registered previously will be shifted down in sequence and the oldest data will be deleted Use the event history table for maintenance information It can be displayed on the programmer as belo
178. es S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 Programming Example 6 1 Sample system In this section simple sequences as examples input output allocation program designing and also the procedures for the actual programming operation are shown Refer to them when using the S2T Let us consider the sequence in the following diagram as an example 9191919 Numerical setting device BCD output type O Operation switches start stop emergency stop fault reset Limit switches LSO LS1 LS2 LS3 T3 o o Motor answerback running forward running in reverse I J Motor forward reverse Lamp displays preparation complete operating operation Z N complete fault ppc oy ry Oli Numerical display device BCD input type When the Start switch is pressed with LSO in the ON state the following operation is executed F F F LSO oward gt LS1 oward gt LS2 oward gt LS3 Stop for 1 second Stop for 2 seconds Stop for 3 seconds Stop for 10 seconds Reverse after LSO returns to ON The above operation is repeated only for the number of times set by the numerical setting device During the operation the Operating lamp is lit and at the same time the actual number of executions at that time is displayed on the numerical display device When the operation is completed the Operating lamp w
179. et value CSV 0 00 to 100 00 Data range 0 to 10000 A 3 Manual mode MV MMV 25 00 to 125 00 Data range A 4 MV tracking input TMV 25 00 to 125 00 96 Data range 2500 to 12500 A 5 Mode setting MODE Data range 2500 to 12500 E C 8 4 0 A Operation mode 00 Manual mode 01 Auto mode 10 Cascade mode 11 Reserve Tracking designation 0 No 1 Yes B Proportional gain Kp 0 00 to 327 67 Data range 0 to 32767 B 1 Integral time T 0 000 to 32 767 min stop if T 2 0 Data range 0 to 32767 B 2 Derivative time T 0 000 to 32 767 min Data range 0 to 32767 B 3 Gap dead band GP 0 00 to 10 00 96 Data range 0 to 1000 B 4 Auto mode initial set value ISV 0 00 to 100 00 96 Data range 0 to 10000 B 5 Input filter constant FT 0 000 to 0 999 Data range 0 to 999 B 6 ASV differential limit DSV 0 00 to 100 00 At Data range 0 to 10000 B 7 MMV differential limit DMMV 0 00 to 100 00 At Data range 0 to 10000 User s manual Functions 245 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Operation 246 V series S2T B 8 Initial status STS F C 8 4 0 Initial operation mode 00 Manual mode 01 Auto mode 10 Cascade mode 11 Reserve Direct reverse selection 0 Direct 1 Reverse B 9 MV upper limit MH 25 00 to 125 00 Data range 2500 to 12500 B 10 MV lower limit ML 25 00 to 125 00 95 Data range 2500 to 12500 B 11 MV differe
180. eulejou uonei do s b lul peuBisun 9 E UOISIND 198 8 y ul Jepureuje y pue 5 ul juenonb ay s iols g o g v FE ejbuis ejanop p ubisun H Jo sjuejuoo eui Aq V L v JO siuejuoo eui sapinig uoneJedo JaBajul paubisun x LLL L v ul Jepuyewas ay pue LO ul juenonb ay seJois o g n H uolsialp paubisun pue g Jo sjuajuoo eui Aq y 10 sjuejuoo ay sapinig uone nojeo H 161 Zey peufisun O 1 9 u yns 1 eui sesos pue Sal 9 1 09 8 n v uogeoidninui paubisun 66 g sjuejuoo eu Aq v siue1uoo ay s lidiliniy jjnseJ uonejedo ay o Buipioooe seBueyo Bey Aueo eu 9 1 9 ur nseJ eui s iols _ Es AUS yum 22 pue Tel L v jo siueiuoo eui wo Bey Areo eui JO Olio 8 1 48 o a v P uonoeuqns ujBuer ejqnog a Ssjuejuoo ay Snid g g jo siuejuoo eui 5106 8 uonejedo eui Su plo99e seoueuo Heyy Areo eu 1 ul ynsas m Aueo 22 ay eu seJojs pue g g JO sjuajuoo ay pue y 1 y do 40 a a o a v Pr yum uonippe uiBuer eiqnoq Jo sjuajuoo y o ej Aueo y jo sjuejuoo eui sppy inseJ uonejedo ay o seBueuo Bey Areo eu 2 ul DNE 629 eV ynsau ay seJoijs pue y jo sjuejuoo ay Bey Aue eko 8 o v 2 7 ay jo sjuajuos eui pue q jo sjuejuoo eui sioenqngs 1190 uoneJedo eui o saBueyo Bey Aueo eu
181. flag for activating the sub program and Status means the execution status flag which can be monitored in the user program cution Mode Transition I O Timer Sub 1 Main Mode Timer Main 96 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS 3 User Program Execution Control Sub 2 special mode operation System initialization If Sub 2 is set as the special mode S0403 1 and the Hot restart condition is fulfilled 8040021 and recovery from power off less than 2 sec Sub 2 will be executed once in the first scan before Main execution n this case Sub 1 is not executed Also when the Hot restart condition is fulfilled the initial load and the user data initialization will not be performed Sub 2 special mode can be used as the initial setting program for the restart from power interruption Hot restart Normal mode operation Sub 2 Sub 3 Sub 4 re First scan Second scan Mode Transition I O Timer Sub 2 Main Mode I O Timer Main In the normal mode the sub programs will be executed after the main program execution with time limit The time assigned for the sub program execution is different between in the floating scan mode and in the constant scan mode In the floating scan mode The user sets the sub program execution time in the system information The setting range is 1 to 100 ms 1 ms units The activated sub program s will be executed within this time limit If
182. following condition fulfilled Blank No setting counts 1 1 to 65535 TT Counts Other setting items are the same as the arm start condition MOIE VAV The evaluation of the conditions are performed at the end of every scan Execution example Sampling target and condition setting example n 1 Buffer Size U klords 2 Sampling Type 7 registers 8 devices 3 registers 8 devices 3 Condition Start D2081 3 Unsign Sign E 1 Stop EBIBB 1 Sign 1 AFTER I 4 Trigger Condition 1 11 031 Unsign Sign 1 i 5 Sampling Disable Emshle Disable Enable B Sampling Status Standby Executing 7 Sampling Target KE T D29098 D28911 evict sabii Y01094 Y01085 Y lB5 1 Peer f 11 18 i EE RN VO zr dit TEB Stop Cancel T rz rj F ES FE DN E r Fie In the above example the data of YW008 D1000 D2001 S0041 Y0104 Y0105 Y0106 and R0100 are collected every scan for the duration of from D2001 changed to 10 scans after R0100 changed to ON User s manual Functions 11 7 5 RAS Functions PART 2 FUNCTIONS Data display example 1 Data z 3 4 5 D 7 8 y m Rey ister Lm 4898 4133 4187 4242 4295 4346 4338 4458 4588 4549 BE 2 24 43 73 98 124 149 1 282 226 nz 2008 mp dm 482 41808 oam 4888 on 1 i le ice SERAL e a KH o yeias o 6 o o
183. formation Always possible Reading the program Reading data Batch reading the program Possible except in ERROR mode Search Program check Program writing to IC memory Possible in HALT mode card EEPROM Memory clear Automatic I O allocation Writing VO allocation information Writing the system information Possible in the HALT mode Writing the program Batch writing the program Program reading from flash memory On line program change Possible except in the ERROR mode Writing data Possible except in the ERROR mode __ NOTE VAV If the password function is used available functions are limited according to the protect level of the password Refer to 5 13 for the password function User s manual Functions 93 3 User Program Execution Control PART 2 FUNCTIONS 3 1 Program types 94 V series S2T The S2T can run several different program types in parallel this function is called the multitask function This function can be used to realize the optimal response time for each application The programs are classified into the 3 types below There are a total of 14 programs Main program one This program will be executed every scan and forms the main part of the scan Sub programs 4 This program can be activated by other programs A total of 4 1 4 are provided 1 is fixed function In the floating scan the sub program
184. g A CAUTION 1 Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock 2 Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock Use crimp style terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover the conductive parts Also close the terminal covers securely on the terminal blocks when wiring has been completed 3 Operation without grounding may cause electrical shock or malfunction Connect the ground terminal on the S2T to the system ground 4 Applying excess power voltage to the S2T can cause explosion or fire Apply power of the specified ratings described in the S2T User s Manual Hardware 5 Improper wiring can cause fire electrical shock or malfunction Observe local regulations on wiring and grounding User s manual Functions 1 Before reading this manual Operation NWARNING Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the S2T Otherwise malfunction of the S2T can cause injury or serious accidents 10 N CAUTION Operate the S2T and the related modules with closing the terminal covers Keep hands away from terminals while power on to avoid the risk of electrical shock When you attempt to perform force outputs RUN HALT controls etc during operation carefully check for safety Turn on power to the S2T before turning on power to the loads Failure to do so may cause unexpected behavior of the loads Set operat
185. ges When designing a program arrange the conditions and give them careful thought so that the program will follow the flow of operations as far as possible Here the program is composed using basic instructions only The following is a simple explanation of the instructions used in this program NO contact Put output ON when the input is ON and the state of device is ON NC contact Put output ON when the input is ON and the state of device is OFF Transitional contact rising Put output ON only when the input at the previous scan was OFF and the input at the present scan is ON Coil Put device ON when the input is ON and put device OFF when the input is OFF ON delay timer After the input has changed from OFF to ON put output ON after the elapse of the time specified by y Also at this time put the corresponding timer relay ON the 0 1 second timer in the example on the next page Counter With the enable input in the ON state count the number of times the count input is ON and store in counter register Cnnn When the values of and Cnnn become equal put output ON When the enable input is OFF clear Cnnn and put output OFF Binary conversion When the input is ON convert the value of BCD which has been stored in to a binary number and store in B BCD conversion When the input is ON convert the value of to BCD and is store in O Master control set reset Put the power rail between MCS
186. ging function 1 20 V series S2T The following functions are supported by S2T for effective program debugging Refer to separate manuals for programmers for operation of these There are two functions in the force function input force and coil force Batch input data is not updated in the input force specified register device The registers devices which can be specified for forced input are the input register device XW X link register relay W Z in the receiver area and link register relay LW L in the receiver area On the other hand coil force specified coil instruction can not be processed when the program is running so despite the state of the program the coil device maintains its previous state Simulated input and simulated output are made possible by the combined use of the force function and the data setting function This function enables to change the user program online during RUN The changes are made after completion of one scan so it extends the inter scan cycle Online program change is subject to the following conditions e You cannot make changes to the number or order of execution control instructions below END MCS MCR JOS JCR JUMP LBL FOR NEXT CALL SUBR RET IRET You cannot change the SFC structure in the SFC program section but you can change the detail parts ladder diagram which relate to steps and transitions Also there is the constant operand changing function This function
187. gister Content SW078 TOSLINE F10 commands status SW093 SW094 TOSLINE F10 scan error map SW109 SW110 TOSLINE S20 CH1 station status SVV111 TOSLINE S20 CH2 station status SW112 TOSLINE S20 1 online map SW115 SW116 TOSLINE S20 2 online map SW119 SW120 TOSLINE S20 CH1 standby SW123 SW124 TOSLINE S20 CH2 standby map SVV127 SVV128 TOSLINE S20 scan healthy map SW191 SW192 Reserve for future use SW255 1 60 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data Name Function S0000 0 Initializing 4 HOLD mode B D STOP 0001 1 HALT mode 6 ERROR mode D S HALT 0002 SES 2 RUN mode 9 D HALT E S RUN S0003 3 Run F mode A D RUN F S STOP S0004 CPU error Down ON when error occurs OR condition of related flag in SW001 S0005 I O error Down ON when error occurs OR condition of related flag in SW002 S0006 Program error Down ON when error occurs OR condition of related flag in SVV003 S0007 EEPROM alarm Warning 7777v1 of writing times 100 000 exceeded S0008 Constant scan delay Warning ON when actual scan time exceeds the constant scan time setting S0009 I O alarm Warning ON when UO error detected by I O error mapping S000A Calendar LSI error Warning ON when clock calendar data fault operation continues S000B
188. gisters 2 When the data cannot be read correctly due to the calendar LSI fault these registers become HOOFF 3 Calendar accuracy is 30 seconds month 1 64 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data Special device Name Function S0140 Bit register check Bit pattern register value check is ecuted by setting ON S0141 Bit register check result ON when either S0142 S0146 is ON 0142 Bit pattern check result ON when bit pattern check error detected 0143 Register value check result 1 ON when register value check error detected for register 1 S0144 Register value check result 2 ON when register value check error detected for register 2 S0145 Register value check result 3 ON when register value check error detected for register 3 S0146 1 2 3 4 Register value check result 4 ON when register value check error detected for register 4 S0147 S0148 S0149 S014A S014B S014C S014E S014D S014F Reserve for future use S0150 S0152 S0151 S0153 S0154 S0156 S0155 S0157 S0158 S0159 S015A S015B S015C S015D S015E UO error mapping I O error mapping is executed by setting ON Reserve for future use S015F Checkpoint for bit register check OFF before program execution ON after p
189. haracters can be set The program ID can be registered monitored on the system information screen of the programmer 2 System Comments These are comments attached to the user program A setting of up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be set The system comments can be registered monitored on the system information screen of the programmer 3 Memory Capacity This stores the memory type user program capacity data register capacity The memory capacity can be monitored on the system information screen of the programmer monitor only 4 Steps Used This stores the number of steps used in the user program The number of steps used can be monitored on the system information screen of the programmer monitor only b PLC Type This stores the model type The PLC type can be monitored on the system information screen of the programmer monitor only 6 Program Size Setting This is the capacity assigned to the user program The rest of this setting out of total 32k steps is assigned to the comments The program size setting can be registered monitored on the system information screen of the programmer 7 Sampling Buffer Setting This performs the setting and registration of the storage capacity of the sampling buffer for the sampling trace function The maximum setting is 8k words The sampling buffer setting can be registered monitored on the system information screen of the programmer User s manual Functions 139 2 User Pr
190. he Workfile VVorkfile Offline memory Write the input output allocation information based on the I O allocation determined in 1 above Write the program designed in 2 above into the disk Do not forget the END instruction at the end of the program Connect the S2T and the programmer T PDS by the dedicated cable and start the S2T with HALT mode Set the T PDS to Online mode When communications between the S2T and the T PDS are established the S2T operation mode is displayed on the T PDS screen PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 1 Overview 10 11 Clearing Memory Program Transfer Program Debugging Program Modification Writing into the EEPROM Normal Operation Clear the S2T s memory by issuing the Clear Memory command from the T PDS If the S2T is in ERROR mode issue the Error Reset command then issue the Clear Memory command Transfer the program created in offline mode to the S2T Put the S2T into RUN mode and check the operation When the I O modules are not all mounted use the Forced RUN RUN F function Carry out any required modifications to the program When the S2T CPU has built in flash memory PU662T PU672T write the program into the flash memory Put the RAM ROM switch to ROM and the operation mode switch to RUN Operation will then start automatically the next time when power is switched
191. hers are 0 cleared For coil forced output devices the previous state Output registers devices YW Y is maintained the others are 0 cleared For registers designated as retentive and coil Auxiliary registers devices RW R forced devices the previous state is maintained the others are 0 cleared Special registers devices SW S initialized and the user setting Timer registers relays T T For registers designated as retentive and the devices which correspond to them the previous Counter registers relays C C state is maintained the others are 0 cleared Data registers D For registers designated as retentive the previous 9 state is maintained the others are 0 cleared For forced link devices the previous state is maintained the others are 0 cleared For forced link relays the previous state is maintained the others are 0 cleared File registers F All maintained Index registers I J K All 0 cleared Link registers relays W Z Link relays LW L The retentive memory area designation is available for the RW T C and D registers These areas are designated by the system information setting function of the programmer For each register the area from the first address 0 to the designated address becomes the retentive memory area T PDS s Retentive Memory Area Designation Screen 13 Retentive memory area RWO00 T000 C000 D0000 40 V seri
192. his I O allocation information On the other hand the programmer reads this I O allocation information when communicating with the S2T and recognizes the assignment whether input XW or output YW for every input output register address There are 2 methods for the registration of 1 O allocation information in system information These are automatic UO allocation and manual I O allocation The registration of l O allocation information is only available when the S2T is in the HALT mode This is a method of causing the S2T to execute the registration of UO allocation information t is carried out by selecting and executing the AutoSet command on the I O allocation screen of the programmer T PDS When the automatic UO allocation is executed the S2T CPU reads out state of the UO modules which are mounted what type of module is mounted in which position and registers the I O allocation information Each UO module has one of the module types shown below Module Description Module Type DI632D 652 8 points DC input X 1W DI633 16 points DC input X 1W DO635 64 points DC output AC663 16 points AC output RO663 16 points Relay output RO662S 8 points Relay output isolated AD624L 634L AD624 634 4 channels analog input RT614 AD668 TC618 8 channels analog input DA632L DA662 672 4 channels analog output User s manual Functions 197 4 VO Allocation PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION For instanc
193. ill go out and the Operation complete lamp will be lit If the Stop switch is pressed during the operation the motor is stopped at that position and after 1 second starts in reverse When the LSO becomes ON the motor is stopped and after 1 second the Preparation complete lamp is lit User s manual Functions 41 6 Programming Example PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING When LSO is ON in states other than during operation the Preparation complete lamp is lit The Start switch is only effective when the Preparation complete lamp is lit amp When the Emergency stop switch has been pressed the motor is stopped in that position and the Fault lamp is lit In that state if the Fault reset switch is pressed the Fault lamp will go out 6 2 Input output allocation First decide the module configuration and make a Map of Correspondence between external signals and registers devices Here the allocation is made for modules with the configuration shown below Module configuration and register allocation 012 3 4 P PIDIDIR Rack BU643D for Basic 3 I O slots S U lI OlO PS PS693 100 120 200 240 Vac 6 6161616 CPU PU662T Standard 9 6131316 nput DI634 32 points DC input 3 2141413 Output DO634 32 points output T RO663 16 points isolated Relay output XW000 XW001 YVVO02 YVVOO3 YVVO04 J nput Output Map
194. ill wait for confirmation Key in Y Unit 58 Unit 31 Unit 82 Unit 1 Top EE e Top Register No Top No Top Hegister Na t 1 Wnit 55 unit Unit D nit t3 Slot TA Slot I Slot 1 0 Slot iu PU B L eI 1 at 1 at x a il 1 11 LI 1 it Y a 2 21 i Z Y M 3 3 I 31 1 j a 1 41 1 al 41 1 1 a 5 1 5 5 1 1 5 1 1 Bt 641 1 6 1 1 7 T 7 I 7 1 a s f i I al 1 3 1 3 1 3I 1 3 i m i i 18 1 18 I I i This completes the 1 O allocation 54 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 Programming Example 4 Now we enter the program typing phase First press the Esc key to return to the initial menu Unit r8 Unit 1 Unit 42 Unit 3 Top Register Na Top Register Mo Tap Register Nu Top Register No 1 E 1 i nit P nit EL Vnit 82 Wuit i Shot 1 4 Slat Le Slot 1 8 Sint 1 0 PU 1 et Bt 8I 1 i BI X M 11 1 I 11 1 11 Y Nl 21 1 21 I 2 l 2 Y X 3 3 1 3 1 1 3I 4 1 41 41 1 41 1 5 51 1 5 j 51 1 5 f 6 1 1 5t H 61 1 T 1 T I T 1 T i BI 1 a ft I 8 1 81 3 1 3I 1 3 1 1 s 1 18 i 18 1 18 1 D Return to top nenu gt Y du H No 1 fffinet it Topley MEAT Weer OH 7 eT H 95 F Ho HH TE The programmer will wait for c
195. imer interrupt program d 1 A UO interrupt program 1 4 A 0 lh O E uem EE A I O interrupt program 2 25 2775 Rungm I O interrupt program 3 Block n m no limit DEL s n maximum 256 YHH I O interrupt program 4 Hag e 1 I O interrupt program 5 I O interrupt program 6 UO interrupt program 7 TX I O interrupt program 8 Sub routine PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 4 User Program 11 Program Types As program types the main program sub programs 1 4 the timer interrupt program I O interrupt programs 1 8 and the sub routines are available Although there is a capacity limit of within a total of 31 5K 63 5k steps there is no capacity limit on any of the program types Blocks From 1 to 256 are effective as block numbers Every block has no capacity limit In the S2T apart from the Ladder diagram the SEC language can be used However multiple languages cannot be used in one block In other words when multiple languages are used it is necessary to separate blocks In the case of using the ladder diagram only there is no need to divide the block Rungs Within the block the user program is managed by the rung number In the case of the Ladder diagram A rung signifies one grouping which is linked by lines other than right and left power rails There is no limit to the number of rungs which can be programmed with
196. in one block The size of one rung is limited to 11 lines x 12 rows maximum 132 steps as shown in the following diagram User s manual Functions 35 4 User Program PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 4 4 Program execution sequence 36 V series S2T The main program is the main body of the user program which executes every scan and must have at least one END instruction Here the program execution sequence is described in the case of the main program only The operation of other program types is described in Part 2 The user program is executed in the following sequence The main program is executed in sequence from the first block the lowest number block to the block which contains the END instruction Q Within one block it is executed in sequence from the first rung Rung 1 to the last rung in the case of the block containing the END instruction to the rung which has the END instruction Within one rung it is executed in accordance with the following rules 1 When there is no vertical dj dm Se N connection execution is A Z carried out from left to right 2 When there are OR 1 411 Bu We N connections the OR logic 3 H S 7 path is executed first 5 3 When there are branches 111 311 4 5 N execution is carried out 2 6 gt J from the upper line to the
197. instruction and END instruction in the relay symbol type instructions is called the basic ladder instructions 3 Instructions other than the basic ladder instructions are called function instructions The function instructions have respective individual function numbers FUN No Also even if instructions have the same function number selection of the execution conditions is possible as shown below There are some instructions which cannot be selected Normal Executed every scan while the instruction input is ON Edged Executed only in the scan in which the instruction input changes from OFF to ON Example Data Transfer Instruction R0000 Nomal 10 MOV D1000 The MOV instruction substitute 10 in D1000 is executed every scan while R0000 is ON R0000 w Edged symbol Edged I 10 MOV D1000 The MOV instruction substitute 10 in D1000 is executed only in the scan in which R0000 changes from OFF to ON Any instructions cannot be positioned after to the right of a edged function instruction Example X0011 I 10 MOV D1000 H 20 MOV D1000 X0011 R0001 02000 300 6 D2000 a Neither of these tvvo rungs can be created PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 4 The number of steps required for one instruction differs depending on the type of instruction Also even with the same instruction the number of steps occupied varies depe
198. ion user setup items received from the peripherals is stored in the system information 7 Reading the program In response to a request from peripherals a specified range of instructions will be read from the user program memory and sent to the peripherals 8 Writing the program A specified range of instructions is received from peripherals and written onto the user program memory After writing the BCC check code correction will be carried out immediately User s manual Functions 91 2 Internal Operation PART 2 FUNCTIONS 92 V series S2T 9 On line program change Changing the content of the user program memory adding changing inserting deleting and the BCC correction will be carried out in the RUN mode This action is performed after completion of one scan so the scan cycle is extended while this is being processed Changing the program on line is subject to the following restrictions You may not change the number or running order of instructions which are related to the program execution see below END MCS MCR JOS JCR JUMP LBL FOR NEXT CALL SUBR RET IRET You may not change the SFC structure in the SFC program but you may change the action corresponding to a step and a transition condition Ladder diagram part 10 Batch reading of program The content of the user program memory including the system information is read and sent to the peripherals It is used for the program up
199. ion mode switches of the S2T and I O modules Improper switch settings may cause malfunction of the S2T and related equipment Do not use any modules of the S2T for the purpose other than specified This can cause electrical shock or injury Configure the external circuit so that the external power required for output modules and power to the loads are switched on off simultaneously Also turn off power to the loads before turning off power to the S2T Install fuses appropriate to the load current in the external circuits for the relay output modules Failure to do so can cause fire in case of load over current Check for proper connections on wires connectors and modules Insufficient contact can cause malfunction or damage to the S2T and related equipment Turn off power immediately if the S2T is emitting smoke or odor Operation under such condition can cause fire or electrical shock Also unauthorized repairing will cause fire or serious accidents Do not attempt to repair Contact Toshiba for repairing 2 V series S2T Before reading this manual Maintenance A CAUTION 1 Do not charge disassemble dispose in a fire nor short circuit the batteries It can cause explosion or fire Observe local regulations for disposal of them 2 Turn off power before removing or replacing units terminal blocks or wires Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the S2T and related equipment 3 Replace a b
200. ious state is maintained the others are 0 cleared All maintained All 0 cleared User s manual Functions 77 2 Internal Operation PART 2 FUNCTIONS 1 For the force function refer to 5 11 Debug Support Function 2 For the retentive memory area designation refer to Part 3 Section 2 2 User program check The contents of the user program on the main memory RAM are checked by BCC 2 3 Mode control S2T operation mode is selected according to the status of the operation mode switch on the CPU module and mode change requests from the peripherals programmer computer link data transmission system The S2T operation mode is basically divided into three RUN mode HALT mode and ERROR mode Also within the RUN mode other than the usual RUN mode RUN F HOLD and DEBUG modes mainly for debugging are also available Operation mode switch HALT mode 574v 7 v 7 57 gt RUN mode Mode change according to commands from peripherals I du LE EI m RUN F mode 4 RUN mode gt HOLD mode AS Ul DEBUG mode illi Result of diagnosis r ERROR mode 78 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Internal Operation The following explains the operation of each mode after which the conditions mode transition conditions are explained HALT RUN RUN F HOLD DEBUG ERROR All external outputs are switched OFF user program exec
201. is put ON When Operation complete R014 is ON ROO is put to reset When the operation mode R003 is ON the MCS MCRis executed The value of the numerical setting device is binary converted at the beginning of the operation and is substituted in D5000 2 R010 is put ON at the beginning of the operation R010 is reset by LS1 X019 being ON When Cycle complete 1 068 is ON also in the same way R010 is put ON T 065 is put ON after LS1 X019 has been ON for 1 second When T 065 is ON R011 is put ON and held R011 is reset by LS2 X01A being ON T 066 is put ON after 52 X014 has been ON for 2 seconds User s manual Functions 45 6 Programming Example PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING Stop Sequence 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 T 066 X01B R012 Mt d 2 LS3 Running forward R012 XO1B R013 30 TON T067 LS3 Running 3 seconds delay reverse T 067 X018 R013 M s 2 LS0 Running in reverse R013 X018 R010 100 TON To68 LSO Running 10 seconds delay forvvard T 068 S R014 CNT 2 Cycle Operation complete complete D5000 C000 CODO BCD YW02 Numerical display MCR R002 E MCS Stop X018 e J 4 10 TON T069 LSO 1 second delay T 069 R015 2 Running in rever
202. isters b Slots for which SP space is set output registers are allocated internally by a number of set words 6 Modules for which Z TL S and TL F are set do not occupy input output registers XW YW 7 Input output registers which are not allocated to I O modules become output registers YW in the programming Thus they can be used in the same way as auxiliary registers relays RW R User s manual Functions 201 4 VO Allocation PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION The following examples show the register allocation when the I O allocation information is registered Example 1 1 O allocation information 202 V series S2T Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Base address Base address Base address Base address T Module type Module type T Module type T Module type t t t t PU 0 X 4W 0 Y 1W 0 Y AW 0 X 2W 1 X AW 1 Y AW 1 Y AW 1 X AW 2 X AW 2 Y AW 2 Y AW 2 X AW 3 3 Y 1W 3 3 X 1W 4 4 Y 2W 4 4 X AW 5 Y 2W 5 Y 2W 5 5 X 2W 6 Y 2W 6 Y 2W 6 6 X 2W 7 7 Y 2W 7 7 TL F e Register allocation Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 i Register o Register 0 Register 0 Register t t t t PU 0 XW010 XW013 YWO26 YVVO38 O XW000 XW001 1 XW014 XW017 1 YWO27 1 YWO39 1 XW002 2 XW018 XW021 2 YWO28 2 YW040 2 XW003 3 3 YWO29 3 3 XW004 4 4 YWO30 YW
203. l y o Heyy Aueo y Jo sjuejuoo ay snid g sppy e 0 9 ul jepureuie1 ay pue 2822 6 9 9 1 0 uriuenonb eui pue qog u a 1448 0 140 8 1 8 aq v 1 v uorsmp aog ui amp uereranoa 661 Jo sjuejuoo eui Aq y 1 y 10 siuejuoo eui sepinig 9 1 0 2 0 eH O uo e91dnuu 2 Sr ul yins i y se1ojs pue Gog u 8 1 8 0 1 0 g i g aa 1v S cod kee Jo sjuejuoo eui Aq y L v jo siueiuoo ay s lidiliniy 0 1 5 urunsei eui soos pue qO8 ul v Y jo 1 uolloenqns 9 6 7 Sjuejuoo eut wo g L g jo sjuajuoo eui sioenqns do t 0 8 1 8 aa v Hv aog ul u r lqnoq 0 1 0 ur nee eui seso s pue 408 U v L v s reu Sr jo tee au o 8 1 8 Jo stuaquoo eu sppy LO 1 0 8 19 80 W 1 W F uomppe aog ui amp vereranoa 961 LO ut yas p Jepuyewias eui pue O ul juenonb ay soos pue qog o a a v uoISI p 208 961 ul g 10 sjuajuoo y Aq y jo siueiuoo eui sepinig O 1 9 ur unsei y se101s pue 9 201 L Gon dabo AE E PAED 9 a a g uogeordninu qog rei O ul insei eui sesos pue qog 665 Y Vu y Jo siusuuoo au Woy g jo suejuoo eu sloenqns o a H 5 3 O ul ilns i eui seso s pue uomneJedo 269 o g g v FF uonippe qog 261 ps sn peuinbo4 T aun sdajs reuiungs uonejueseJde
204. le CPU register gt CPU register e CPU register Expanded F register e CPU register TOSLINE S20 or TOSLINE S20LP here called S20 or S20LP CPU register Flash memory D register Execution condition Input Operation Output ERF OFF No execution OFF ON Normal execution ON When error is occurred see Note ON Set Operand Device Register Con index stant Name X YISILIR ZI C I O JX YISIL RIWTICIDIF IIO lI J K VV W W W W WW Deelen NN N IN IN NL EN v N y parameter kasqa Y Y Y Y Y Y V Y Y N d size C Destination Ab E AN A 4 parameter Source parameter Transfer size and status Destination parameter A Bank CH Type B Transfer size C Bank CH Type A 1 Leading address B 1 Status flag C 1 Leading address Scan healthy map B 16 Max 16 words e Refer to the following table for contents of each designation e The status flag is created only when the transfer from S20 to Register User s manual Functions 253 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Transfer parameter table Transfer object Bank CH TYPE Leading address Transfer size pow XW YW register 0 HOO 1 0to 511 1 to 256 None W register 0 H01 0 to 2047 1 to 256 None E LW register 0 Ho2 0 to 255 1 to 256 None
205. loading S2T gt Programmer gt Disk 11 Batch writing the program The user program including the system information is received from peripherals and will be stored in the user program memory It is used for program download Disk gt Programmer gt S2T 12 Search The instruction operand specified by peripherals will be searched through the user program memory and their address will be sent to peripherals 13 Program check When the program check command is received the user program syntax will be checked The result of this check will be sent to peripherals 14 Reading data The specified data will be read from the user data memory in response to a request from the peripherals and the data will be sent to the peripherals 15 Writing data User data address and data content received from peripherals will be stored in the user data memory PART 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Internal Operation 16 Program reading from the EEPROM flash memory The checked the flash memory content will be transferred to the user program memory and user data memory RW T C D of the main memory RAM 17 Program writing to EEPROM flash memory The content of the user program memory and the user data memory RW T C D will be transferred to the flash memory The execution conditions for these functions are shown in the following table Function Execution conditions Reading I O allocation information Reading system in
206. location slots for which no type is set do not occupy registers These are called vacant slots P S C UO gt x gt x zm x zw lt 200m lt O lt L 2002 lt Y 2 W XW000 XW001 XW002 XW003 XW004 XW005 YW006 YW007 YW008 YW009 K 4 In case of the 4 slot basic rack BU643D slots 4 to 7 are regarded as vacant Similarly in case of the 6 slot expansion rack BU666 slots 6 to 7 are regarded as vacant Register allocation table PUO 1 2 Basic Ple ix xy G UM 0 ilo F S Plolalo tlt U W w w 0101 X2W XWO00 XW001 012 3 1 XW002 XW003 Expansion PIX XIX Y 21 Y2W 1 XVVO04 XW005 3 E 1 F o 2 2 2 VV VV VV VV sl 2 7 Vacant m o v n Tess ae 1 X2W XVVOOS XW009 3 X2W XVV012 XW013 7 Vacant 28 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 3 VO Allocation 5 After an input output register is allocated to an I O module the individual external signals on the module are allocated to each bit device on the register At this time in modules to which multiple registers are allocated lower register address is allocated to the lower common LC side Example The following is the input signal and input device coordination when XW004 and XW005 are allocated to a 32 point input module X2W
207. lown fuse with a specified one Failure to do so can cause fire or damage to the S2T 4 Perform daily checks periodical checks and cleaning to maintain the system in normal condition and to prevent unnecessary troubles 5 Check by referring Troubleshooting section of the S2T User s Manual Hardware when operating improperly Contact Toshiba for repairing if the S2T or related equipment is failed Toshiba will not guarantee proper operation nor safety for unauthorized repairing 6 The contact reliability of the relays used in the relay output module will reduce if the switching exceeds the specified life Replace the module if exceeded 7 Replace the battery every 2 years to maintain the S2T s program and data normally 8 Do not modify the S2T and related equipment in hardware nor software This can cause fire electrical shock or injury 9 Pay special attention for safety if you attempt to measure circuit voltage at the S2T s terminal 10 Turn off power before replacing modules Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the S2T and related equipment If you attempt to replace an I O module while power on by using on line I O replacement function carefully check for safety User s manual Functions 3 Before reading this manual Purpose of this manual Inside of this manual 4 V series S2T This manual describes the functions those functions which can be achieved by the CPU and the basic har
208. m the programmer or to switch the power supply OFF and ON again VAV 1 Programs can be changed in both the RUN mode and the RUN F mode this is called the online program changing function However only normal programming in the HALT mode is described in Part 1 See Part 2 for the online program changing function 2 Apart from the above 4 modes there are actually the HOLD mode and the DEBUG mode as well These are described in Part 2 User s manual Functions 19 2 Operation Outline PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 2 2 Modes transition conditions To determine change the operation mode of the S2T the operation mode switch on the CPU module programmer PLC control commands and S2T self diagnosis are available Also the RAM ROM switch on the CPU module controls the operation mode at power up These are described below Operation Mode Switch HALT RUN Switch Position RUN Operation Mode When the mode switch is shifted from RUN or P RUN to HALT the operation mode will turn to the HALT mode Also when power is switched ON with the mode switch at HALT the S2T will start up in the HALT mode When the mode switch is shifted from HALT to RUN the operation mode will turn to the RUN mode The mode when power is switched ON in the RUN position will be determined by the RAM ROM switch Auto RUN Standby selection Switch Position Operation Mode Auto RUN The S2T
209. mains unchanged 2 When the instruction input is ON Executes PID calculation every n scan which is specified by B425 B 24 The following operation modes are available according to the setting of A 11 4 10 e Auto mode This is a normal PID control mode with ASV as set value Set value differential limit DSV manipulation value upper lower limit MH ML and differential limit DMV are effective Bump less changing from auto mode to manual mode is available Manual mode manipulation value MMV is over written by current MV automatically MMV MV User s manual Functions 251 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 252 V series S2T e Manual mode In this mode the manipulation value MV can be directly controlled by the input value of MMV MV differential limit for manual mode DMMV is effective MH ML and DMV are not effective When mode is changed from manual to auto or cascade the operation is started from the current MV e Cascade mode This is a mode for PID cascade connection PID is executed with CSV as set value Different from the auto mode set value differential limit is not effective Manipulation value upper lower limit MH ML and differential limit DMV are effective Bump less changing from cascade mode to manual mode is available Manual mode manipulation value MMV is over written by current MV automatically MMV MV And bump less changing from cascade mode to auto mode is available Auto mode set
210. manual for these network modules 262 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 5 6 6 Network data receive RECV Expression Function FUN 240 RECV Network data receive Input A RECV B E Output This instruction reads the designated range of register data from another S2T through the network Network TOSLINE S20LP or Ethernet The transfer source register target station is designated by A 5 and A46 The transfer destination register self station is designated by A 3 and A44 The transfer size number of words is designated by A 2 The maximum transfer size is 128 words S20LP or 485 words Ethernet The designation method of the target station is different between S20LP and Ethernet Execution condition Input Operation Output ERF OFF No execution OFF ON During execution OFF Normal complete ON When error is occurred see Note ON Set Operand Device Register 7 Index stant Name EE EELER EE es OA Fa Te Ta Taha a a XI YISILIRIZ T C OllX Y S L R V T C D F LTLO LI IQ K VV VV VV VV VV WI W A nb j aa IN N N N y parameter Status VA aii y In case of S20LP gt In case of Ethernet F C B 8 7
211. mode switch is in RUN and the RAM ROM switch is turned to ROM The initial load is not performed if the user program is written in the flash memory but the contents are destroyed BCC error detection User data initialization The user data registers and devices is initialized according to the conditions in the following table Register Device Input registers devices XW X Output registers devices YW Y Initialization For forced input devices the previous state is maintained the others are 0 cleared For coil forced output devices the previous state is maintained the others are 0 cleared Auxiliary registers devices RW R For registers designated as retentive and coil forced devices the previous state is maintained the others are 0 cleared Special registers devices SVV S Timer registers relays T T counter registers relays C C CPU setting part is initialized and the user setting part is maintained For registers designated as retentive and the device corresponding to the previous state is maintained the others are 0 cleared Data registers D For registers designated as retentive the previous state is maintained the others are 0 cleared Link registers relays VV Z Link relays LVV L File registers F Index registers l J K For forced link devices the previous state is maintained the others are 0 cleared For forced link relays the prev
212. modules In other words physical devices called I O modules are allocated to logic devices called registers devices Input registers devices and output registers devices do not use their own independent memory areas They use a series of memory areas which can be said to be input output registers devices a register address range of 256 words from 000 to 255 By executing l O allocation function type determination is carried out by making addresses allocated to input modules input registers devices and addresses allocated to output modules output registers devices Input Output Registers Input Output Registers um UO Modules Ws 003 x gt 16 point output gt pup sgnas o 004 16 point output gt Output signals e allocation 775 nput Output Registers Note Addresses not allocated to 1 O modules are output YVV internally 1 96 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 4 VO Allocation 4 2 Methods of VO allocation Automatic UO allocation The execution of UO allocation can be said in other words to be the carrying out of the registration of l O allocation information in system information The S2T CPU checks whether the I O modules are correctly mounted based on this I O allocation information when RUN starts up Also at the same time the correspondence between the input output registers XW YW and the l O modules is determined based on t
213. ms system initialization following power on If no abnormality is detected S2T proceeds the mode control processing Here if the RUN mode transitional condition is fulfilled the scan control begins The scan control is the basic function of the S2T for the user program execution operation And if the RUN mode transitional condition is not fulfilled S2T enters the HALT mode and does not execute the user program The peripheral support processing is executed as background for communicating with the programmer and the computer link Self diagnosis is carried out in each processing The above figure shows the self diagnosis executed as background The details of these processes are explained in this section Self diagnosis is explained in 5 RAS functions User s manual Functions 75 2 Internal Operation PART 2 FUNCTIONS System initialization 76 V series S2T 2 2 The system initialization is performed after power is turned on The following flow chart shows the sequence of processes explained below o CPU hardvvare check and initialization E Power off time Power on time record Power interruption Time from power on to completion of the decision system initialization 015 Approx 2 seconds vvithout initial load Approx 3 seconds with initial load Battery check v Initial load r v User data initialization Y User program check
214. n ied coarse se E De E ti ee D da 77 Program Dita a E 38 98 141 Program execution En 43 Progtamsize Seltil ett 141 157 Program VDO aca and A Eed ENEE 40 41 43 104 138 139 146 148 152 155 223 224 231 233 235 Programming language ia 135 139 220 221 223 224 235 R BAM ROM SWIECh cc e de net e n tee ad 18 22 23 24 26 73 80 79 84 85 88 117 RAS UNCON 3 roe ee te ee rere Eee ee ehe eet Bay eee ehe eee ee 75 88 120 135 RUN SMOG Os ten hale E 18 20 24 48 78 169 170 173 PUN TOG cc 75 77 80 81 83 86 100 115 117 128 146 BENEKE Ee ILLA E AS 83 20 211 A THEODERICUS 35 149 152 159 167 168 174 180 182 184 186 188 190 192 212 213 243 245 250 255 261 262 296 Index 263 266 267 268 Retentive memory are 38 48 80 143 164 165 Runo MUMDEE Mete 40 41 43 226 Ruge suspa nanas ences am Heh E D ued 43 84 s DEEN WEE 237 241 242 245 295 SEG INIA ZION ti certe Ete e ua Saya h uqha aed 240 250 ES 241 245 253 295 EA elo EAEE FARE EAIA E 245 250 253 295 SFG Main Program su uu E 237 239 240 241 242 250 DEG EE 100 137 138 139 146 150 155 157 DE GEET 220 221 223 224 235 237 239 240 241 242 244 245 246 248 249 250 252 253 271 284 294 295 296 ec
215. n be designated as retentive memory areas 1 56 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data Special registers Codes Special registers SW and Special devices Special devices S Addresses Special registers 000 255 256 words Special devices 0000 255F corresponding to one bit in a register 4096 points Functions These are registers devices which have special function such as fault flags Error down Warning which are set when the CPU detects a malfunction timing relays and clock calendar data year month day hour minute second day of week which are updated by the CPU flags data which the user sets for executing operational control of the sub programs For details see the following table Timer registers codes Timer registers T and Timer devices Timer devices T Addresses Timer registers 000 999 1000 words Timer devices 000 999 1000 points Functions The timer registers are used together with timer instructions TON TOE SS TRG and store elapsed time increment system when the timer is operating Also the timer devices are linked to the operation of the timer registers with the same address and store the output results of timer instructions The timer registers can be designated as retentive memory areas Counter registers codes Counter registers C and Counter devices Counter device
216. nding on whether digit designation is used in the operand a constant or a register is used in a double length operand etc 1 10 steps 1 instruction Also basically step numbers are not required for vertical connection lines and horizontal connection lines In an instruction which has multiple inputs a vertical connection line cannot be placed immediately before an input In this case insert a dummy contact such as the NO contact of special relay S004F which is always ON immediately before the input Example R0000 R0003 2 R0001 R0004 Not possible 2 CNT R0002 10 C030 Modification R0000 R0003 R0001 S004F R0004 Possible CNT A 10 C030 L The above arrangement is not required for the lowest input of multiple inputs Example R0000 R0003 R0001 5004 R0004 Possible H0002 10 C030 ROO User s manual Functions 21 7 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 21 8 V series S2T 5 3 SFC SFC is the abbreviation of Sequential Function Chart This is a programming language suitable for process stepping control sequential control In the S2T the following function can be used in the SFC Jump Moves the active state to an arbitrary step when a jump condition is satisfied e Step with waiting time Even if the transition condition is satisfied step transition is not carried out un
217. ntial limit DMV 0 00 to 100 00 At Data range 0 to 10000 B 12 Control interval setting n 1 to 32767 times Data range 1 to 32767 Executes PID every n scan Therefore control interval At n X constant scan interval It is treated as n 1 when n x 0 C Manipulation value MV 25 00 to 125 00 96 Data range 2500 to 12500 C 1 1 Internal work area C 9 When the instruction input is OFF Initializes the PID3 instruction Operation mode is set as specified by B 8 A 5 bit 1 B 8 bit 0 1 Auto mode SV is set as specified by B 4 ASV ISV Manual mode MV is set as current MV MMV MV Internal calculation data is initialized MV remains unchanged When the instruction input is ON Executes PID calculation every n scan which is specified by B 12 The following operation modes are available according to the setting of A 5 Auto mode This is a normal PID control mode with ASV as set value Set value differential limit DSV manipulation value upper lower limit MHIML and differential limit DMV are effective Bump less changing from auto mode to manual mode is available Manual mode manipulation value MMV is over written by current MV automatically MMV MV PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language Manual mode In this mode the manipulation value MV can be directly controlled by the input value of MMV MV differential limit for manual mode DMMV is effective MH ML and DMV are not effecti
218. nual is prepared for users of Toshiba s Programmable Controller S2T Read this manual thoroughly before using the S2T Also keep this manual and related manuals so that you can read them anytime while the S2T is in operation 1 The S2T has been designed and manufactured for use in an industrial environment However the S2T is not intended to be used for systems which may endanger human life Consult Toshiba if you intend to use the S2T for a special application such as transportation machines medical apparatus aviation and space systems nuclear controls submarine systems etc 2 The S2T has been manufactured under strict quality control However to keep safety of overall automated system fail safe systems should be considered outside the S2T 3 In installation wiring operation and maintenance of the S2T it is assumed that the users have general knowledge of industrial electric control systems If this product is handled or operated improperly electrical shock fire or damage to this product could result 4 This manual has been written for users who are familiar with Programmable Controllers and industrial control equipment Contact Toshiba if you have any questions about this manual 5 Sample programs and circuits described in this manual are provided for explaining the operations and applications of the S2T You should test completely if you use them as a part of your application system In this manual the following t
219. o Buipioooe sebueyo Sey Aes ey 1 vgl Aq papu syq Jo Jeun eui Aq gS 1uBu eui oi y serejo pue Heyy Areo eui Buipnjour g Aq pepeeu st uu jo eji 110 eui sexer E S g Jl gNn ul uoneouioeds Jose se owes y Aq pereoipur spiom Jaquunu ay Aq uol 58uip ssesppe uiu 1y6u eui o y sajejo pue g Aq pepeeu spiom Ul Jo lqE ay sexe 19 s BaJ e s g 4l a u omw v Aurea UUM YO 91 10J 510 U lil 4q u 68 UG 2 9 0 jnseJ v o Buipioooe sebueyo De Aueo ay 1 v Aq papu syq Jo eui Aq uonoauip gs7 1uBu eui 0 y serejo pue Heyy Aueo eui Duipniour a Aq pepeeu syq wu jo lil 1q eui sexe e S 4 JI CZ8NN4 ul uomeouioeds Jose se ewes y Aq peieoipui jo Jaquunu ay Aq uonoeuip SSeuppe mol 1u8u eui 0 1 sejejo pue g Aq pepeeu spuom Ul 10 ajqe ay S YEL 19 sIBaJ e s g 11 8 u ouu1 v Kujeo UHA 14011 eje1oJ 5110 u eji 110 uu 88 ug LHE LE 9 v nsa v o Buipioooe sebueyo Bey Are ay g ul nse eui s iols pue Hey Auge eui Buipnjour 891 431 eur 01 Ig u v ur erep eui sajejoy a uote v UA H 972401 sliq u 48 46072 6 6 jnseJ v o sebueyo Deu Are ay g ul nee ay selo s pue DEU Aveo ay Buipnjour uonoeJtp 897 yel 94 0 diq u y u ejep eui sajejoy 8 u oyy v
220. o suin a lt y jenbe Jo uey jejeou 26 9 9 9 6 uosueduioo 196184 g v 1 NO 1ndino suni a v uey JaJeelD 96 O ui suq Burgoyeuu uou y sajo s pue ugy c 9 19 3 g pue y Woy Bues s lqe 1e1s 681 ay sejeduio do 8 u anoL v J uosyeduuoo au 96 asedwog sr m aun sd ls trewuns uonejueseJdeH SueN N dnoJc JequinN Nr suononuisu uonounJ suomnonuisu urej6erq 4eppe 278 V series S2T 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION uosueduuoo jurod Suneoli A al jenba 902 g L a s v L v JJ NO 1ndino sun 1448 gt 4 MANN jp do uey seet Julod Buneo y 22 uosueduuoo julod Suneoli 9 02 eias Qo 1d No eno sait 8 1 8 gt a w 1 w uey sse juod Buneo y 912 uosueduuoo eyep julod Suneoli 191 a 1 8 4 Lal 4 NO ndino sun 9 9 viv JH ou julod Suneol Siz uosueduuoo gep julod Suneoli 2 a DEI bee Fino maino suni 4 gt jenbe juod Bupeojd viz uosueduuoo gep julod i _ jenba ane a 1 g lt v 1 v 1 NO Indino sun arta lt 4 we T is su wiest quiod EM uosueduuoo gep julod Suneoli goz e aera no qina ak 8 1 8 lt 4 v y uey
221. of the target station is different between S20LP and Ethernet Execution condition Input Operation Output ERF OFF No execution OFF ON During execution OFF n Normal complete ON VVhen error is occurred see Note ON Set Operand Device Register Con index stant Name XIYISIL Z T C Il O XI IYISILIRIWITICIDIF I IO I J K W W W W W WI W V N N IN INN NN JN y parameter Status Viva aii y In case of S20LP gt In case of Ethernet F C B 8 7 0 F C B 87 0 A MID CH Target station No A MID CH 0 fixed Au 0 fixed A 1 Request command A 2 Transfer size A 2 Transfer size A 3 Register type self station Register type self station A 4 Leading address self station Az4 Leading address self station A 5 Register type target station A 5 Register type target station A 6 Leading address target station A 6 Leading address target station A 7 Response time limit A 7 Response time limit A 8 Target station IP address A 9 A 10 Target station UDP port No __ NOTE VAV Parameters for the Ethernet varies depending on the request command Above figure shows the parameters for the register read write command H0021 User s manual Functions 259 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING
222. ogram Configuration PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 1 40 V series S2T 8 9 Retentive Memory Area Designation This sets and registers the address ranges for the auxiliary register RW timer register T counter register C and data register D which retain pre power cut data out of the user data The ranges registered here are outside the subjects of the user data initialization process For each of these registers the ranges from the leading address 0 to the designated address are the retentive memory areas The retentive memory area designations can be registered monitored on the system information screen of the programmer Scan Time Setting This sets and registers the scan mode floating constant When no scan time is registered blank the mode becomes the floating scan mode When a numerical value is set for the scan time the mode becomes a constant scan mode which takes that time as the scan cycle The setting for the scan cycle is 10 200 ms in 10 ms units The scan time setting can be registered monitored on the system information screen of the programmer 10 Sub Program Execution Time 11 Time limit factor assigned for sub programs in the floating scan The setting range is 1 100 ms in 1 ms units The sub program execution time can be registered monitored on the system information screen of the programmer Timer Interrupt Interval This sets and registers the interrupt cycle of the timer in
223. ogramming when D1001 is entered in the position which designates the double length operand D1002 D1001 is automatically displayed The numerical value range in which double length integers can be processed is shown in the table on the following page PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data Hexadecimal Expression Numerical Value Register 1 Register 2147483647 7FFF FFFF J J J 65536 0001 0000 65535 0000 FFFF J J J 0 0000 0000 1 FFFF FFFF J J 65536 FFFF 0000 65537 FFFE FFFF J J J 2147483648 8000 0000 6 Double Length BCD This is 8 digit BCD data which is expressed by using 2 consecutive registers MSB LSB F C B 8 7 4 3 0 F C B 8 7 4 3 0 lt Bit positions CN A A M 107 10 10 104 10 10 10 10 Register 1 Register The registers are designated in the form 1 3 and becomes the lower 4 digits while 1 becomes the upper 4 digits Example When processing a double length BCD by registers XW001eXW000 XW000 becomes while XW001 becomes 1 and XVVO00 becomes the lower 4 digits while XW001 becomes the upper 4 digits The following table shows the numerical range and the expression format in which double length BCD data can be processed Hexadecimal Expression Numerical Value I Register 1 Register 7 99999999 9999 9999 J J
224. om Jequunu ay Aq uonoeuip SSeuppe wol 1uBu eui o1 1 seyejo pue g Aq pepeeu spJow w jo ejqe1 ay sexe 19 siBaJ e si g u yM a u uiui v E 14611 eje101 eg u eji 110 uu CH UC 07901 9 v 9 eui o Buipuoooe sebueyo Bey Ae eu ASN 491 eui o Sq u y u eui sejejoy g uau v H l 978401 510 u 18 uec ots LL 9 v nsa ay o Buipioooe seDueuo Aueo eu gs7 M H eui o1 siiq u y u yep eui s leloH Jeune H 1461 5110 u 08 8 8 JINSOJ eui o Buipuoooe sebueyo Bey Are eu uonoeup ASIN 491 eui 01 4q v ul ejep eui sajejoy ius E YS 818101 1 62 26 c jnseJ eui o Sulpioooep seDueuo Bey Ae eu uonoeuip 897 1u8u eui ot 1iq y ur ejep eui sejejoy v tu 44u 88401 yq 82 ayejoy sri aun uonnoex4 sda s Jo JOQUINN Kreuiung uolyejuasaiday ON Nr dnog suononuisu uonounJ suomnonuisu urej6erq 19ppe7 User s manual Functions 275 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language E B 9 9 O y ul ay seJojs pue y 19481691 eui Aq pepeeu u ezis Jo eiqei y ul 46181661 ui g eui jo sjuejuoo ay sexe a u xan v FE Jexejdniniw 06 uSc c 9 0 19 v
225. on For this purpose the function generator instruction FUN165 FG is convenient User s manual Functions 247 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 6 3 Floating point essential PID FPID3 Expression Function FUN 232 FPID3 Floating point essential PID Input A 1 A FPID3 B 1 B gt C 1 C Output Performs PID Proportional Integral Derivative control which is a fundamental method of feed back control Pre derivative real PID algorithm The operation of this FPID3 instruction is the same as the PID3 FUN 156 instruction except for dealing data as floating point data Execution condition Input Operation Output OFF Initialization OFF ON Execute PID every setting interval ON when execution Operand Device Register 7 Index Name X Y ISILIR ZI T IC II O X YI SLLIRIN TICIDIFI IL IO I J K VV VV WW WIW Top of input A R AN IN IN N IN JN IN JN NI y Top of Bu 4 N IN N N N N El y Top of da NN IN IN N IN N IN IN y Input data Control parameter Output data A 1 A Process input value VC B 1 B Proportional gain Kp C 1 C Manipulation value MV A mode set value ASV Integral time T Last error 854 C
226. on is the performance of registers correspondence between UO modules and input output registers Here the configurations of input registers and output registers and methods of address expression are described In descriptions hitherto input registers and output registers have been treated as separate entities However from the viewpoint of memory configuration this is not correct User s manual Functions 25 3 VO Allocation PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING In practice the input register and the output register use the same memory area which is called the I O register In other words before performing UO allocation the I O register is not colour divided for input and output Colour division of input and output in register units 16 bit units is performed by carrying out UO allocation Before allocation internally all are regarded as output registers This idea can be conveyed by the following drawing I O Register I O Register before I O allocation after 1 O allocation YWO00 YWO00 lt YW001 VO allocation YW001 lt YW002 YW002 lt YW 255 YW255 bz Register contents 16 bit data Register address Input output classification Input XW Output YW This address expresses allocation as output This address expresses allocation as input The I O register is a 16 bit register and 256 registers are available 16 bit signifies that it s
227. on when the executed MMR allocation is set in the CPU slot Expanded file register Reads writes the data in Accessed by the the expansion memory expanded data transfer 512k words as expanded instruction XFER file registers from the user program User s manual Functions 105 5 RAS Functions PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 1 Overview 5 2 Self diagnosis 1 06 V series S2T The meaning of RAS is Reliability Availability and Serviceability The RAS function is the general term used for the functions installed in the S2T which increase the reliability and serviceability of the applied systems and support the operation of the system This section explains the self diagnostic functions maintenance functions the debugging functions installed in the S2T and the system diagnostic function which can be used by the S2T user The details of the self diagnosis which are designed to prevent abnormal operation the timing of the diagnosis and behavior when malfunctions are detected are shown below In building up a system consider the system operation safety in case of the S2T shutdown fail safe and the system operation backup function In the following explanation error registration means the storing of the details of the error and the time when it occurred on the event history table error down means that all the outputs turn OFF and ERROR mode is entered alarm means that the error is register
228. one by one shift up after erased using the programmer or by the diagnostics display reset instruction DIAR This function may also be used effectively in conjunction with the bit pattern check and the sequence time over detection mentioned below Refer to details of diagnosis display instructions in other manual for instruction set Execution of DIAG instruction error codes registered to SW018 First error code SW019 Error code 2 the end SW020 7 Reset the error code SW021 registration by DIAR instruction or programmer SW033 operation When error codes are registered for example 3 10 29 58 each corresponding annunciator relay 50342 80349 S035C 50379 comes ON Annunciator relay FEDCBA9 8 7 6 SVVO34 116115 14113112111110 9817 SW035 32131 30 29128 27 2612524 23122121 2011911817 SVVO36 148147 46145144 43142 41 40 39 38137136 35134133 SVVO37 164163 62161 60 59158 57 556155 54153152 51150149 o 10 PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 RAS Functions 2 Bit pattern check function This function checks that the device ON OFF status for a number of devices are in the normal combinations pattern For example checks that not more than 2 from device 1 2 and 3 are ON simultaneously Up to 8 devices can be registered and up to 16 patterns can be set The checkpoint can be selected either before program execution or end of sc
229. onfirmation Key in Y T PDs Mir MESI S T Load Save Compare P Program 0 Setup Options M Tata Monitor L miine ffline C Comments K Password D Docmmentatian Q Quit U Usage Map Select by using E l or bid keys and press lEnterl key ffling L x Here select P Program Key in P oo User s manual Functions 55 6 Programming Example PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING Block 1 of the main program is automatically selected and Block M1 will be displayed on the screen Here select F1 Menu from the command line A 3 9 4 ig y FfTiae t Block 3 1 E K Data window S Search and replace reference address M Monitor command F Data format D Debug d Then select E Program Edit from the menu window and key in E A cursor will appear on the screen m zz pye UN Here select F6 Append from the command line Then instruction symbols will appear on the command line Tee 7 r 7517 A 1341 EX RI HUN CY ex 2 5 27 Fe 56 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 Programming Example Here start typing in the program in Section 6 3 First press F7 TON SD 1 2 4 4 L 2m 7 4 Block L I aes ME Line UU dur MUZ TIN HIE cancel Fa d Ya h F d R F3 Input the operan
230. ono uip gS1 1 eui 0 4q v u erep eui syius 5149 g Aq pepeeu u ezis lqe k u S9 11Q lli 1 2 TT Iq 841 JO 1q Uy eui jo lels JJO NO ul sepioeq Lei isi ty FH 0 uey 4eujo s q 1 8 qu Lt s ujBue ejgno go v lc ee 8 1 8 1910 iv B s ujbuerejqnog 59 0 uey Jeujo 9 si g pue v ANY 1801601 eui JI NO Indino eu sun sar gt dan O Aq pepeeu uoneoo ay uri seJojs pue uz 0716 S a Aq pepeeu u ezis jo lqe eui pue y Aq pepeeu o a u una1 v HO ensnjxe JON 09 u ezis JO eu JO HO 8 ON eui spul4 9 Aq pepeeu uoneoo eui u 42 07166 g 11 sais pue g Aq pepeeu u ezis jo age eui pue v o g u uoa1 v HO eAlsnjoxe 6S Aq p pe u u ezis Jo a qe ay JO HO AISn 5x ay spuly LO Aq pepeeu uoneool ayy ul UcZ 0 L c S pue g Aq pepeeu u ezis jo lqe y pue y o a u dol v HE HO elqel 89 Aq p pe u u ezis jo ejqe1 eui JO HO 22 0 ay spul i 9 Aq pepeeu uoneoo eui u UzZ 0 LE 2 S 1 sajo s pue g Aq pepeeu u ezis jo lqel eui pue y o a u av v FE adel ZG suogejedo Aq pepeeu u ezis jo o eu1 jo ANY 9160 eui Spul 221607 sri o aun sd ls Kreuiungs uonejueseJdeuH SUEN N dnog uolno xz o NN suononuisu uonoun suomnonuisu urej6erq 19ppe7 User
231. p 99 Transfer size 99 words F C 16 15 14 13 12 1110918 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 32 31 30 29 28 27126125124123122121120129118117 Status flag scan healthy map 1 Scan normal 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 GE 9998 97 AA AAA A 0 is stored in the excess bits 256 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language CPU register Flash Memory D register Example 1 R0000 RW000 XFER RW002 RWO10 Source designation RW000 HOO H04 RW001 00100 D0100 CPU register Remark Flash Memory D register configuration D0000 Page 1 D0127 D0128 Page 2 D0255 D0256 Page 3 D0383 D7936 Page 64 D8191 Transfer size Destination designation RW002 00032 RWO010 HOO H20 RWO11 00064 32 words transfer D0064 flash memory When R0000 is ON 32 words data starting with D0100 is transferred to D0064 and after in the flash memory Data write into flash memory Flash memory is internally divided by page Writing data into the flash memory is available within one page at a time e For data reading from the flash memory there is no need to consider the pages e The flash memory has a life limit for
232. p and the transition condition corresponds to 1 transition These are programmed by ladder diagram 1 Action Program The size of 1 action program is 11 lines x 11 columns as shown below and the number of instruction steps is a maximum of 121 steps SSSS In a case when a larger size than the above is required as an action program a sub routine is used CALL instruction Even if there is no action corresponding to a step this does not affect SFC operation n this case the step becomes a dummy step a step which waits only the next transition condition will be satisfied In programming by designating the step on the SFC screen and selecting the detail display mode the monitor edit screen for the action program corresponding to that step will appear In the case when the content of the action program is only 1 instruction out of SET RST coil invert coil positive pulse coil and negative transition sensing coil direct editing can be carried out without puffing up the detail display screen See the programmer T PDS operation manual in a separate volume for this operation User s manual Functions 227 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 2 Transition Condition The size of 1 transition condition is 11 lines x 10 columns and the number of instruction steps is a maximum of 110 steps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 When there is no transition condition correspon
233. pecial designation method for register data Digit designation treats 1 digit 4 bits of a hexadecimal number as a data unit t is a method of designation in which a number of digits from the designated devices bit positions are made the subject of data operation In practice in the case of the following Example 2 digits from X0008 that is to say the upper 8 bits of XVV000 become the subject of data operation Example Digit designati in thi 2 digit designati d i e 57 i in ii 55 igit designation X0008 lt Digit designation leading device N Designates the hatched line area F CB 87 43 0 XW000 2nd digit 1st digit j X008 There are 9 types of digit designation QO Q1 Q8 which have the following significations QO makes the designated device 1 bit the subject of data operation Q1 makes 1 digit 4 bits started with the designated device the subject of data operation Q2 makes 2 digits 8 bits started with the designated device the subject of data operation Q3 makes 3 digits 12 bits started with the designated device the subject of data operation Q4 makes 4 digits 16 bits started with the designated device the subject of data operation Q5 makes 5 digits 20 bits started with the designated device the subject of data operation Q6 makes 6 digits 24 bits started with the designated device the subject of data operation Q7 makes 7 digits
234. peration of language designation is not required the default is ladder diagram The ladder diagram program in any one block is registered arranged by units called rung A rung is defined as 1 network which is connected to each other as shown below Rung number Rung User s manual Functions 211 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 21 2 V series S2T The rung numbers are a series of numbers decimal numbers starting from 1 and rung numbers cannot be skipped There is no limit to the number of rungs The size of any one rung is limited to 11 lines x 12 columns as shown below 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 11 H EE Ladder diagram is a language which composes programs using relay symbols as a base in an image similar to a hard wired relay sequence In the S2T in order to achieve an efficient data processing program ladder diagram which are combinations of relay symbols and function blocks are used Relay Symbols These are NO contact NC contact coil and contacts and coils to which special functions are given Each of these is called an instruction Basic ladder instructions Example NO contact Input 4 Output When device is ON the input side and the output side become conductive Viewed from the aspect of program execution the operation is such that when the input is ON and the content of device Q3 is also ON the output will become ON
235. pleted work arrived signal ON etc within 10 seconds from when the work transport started the specified alarm device R1000 comes ON By this means a malfunction of the work drive or the sensor can be detected Refer to Part 3 of this manual and the other instruction set manual for explanation with respect to SFC User s manual Functions 131 5 RAS Functions PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 10 Password function For the system security the password function is provided There are three levels of protection as shown below Accordingly three levels of passwords can be set Level 1 possible functions Clear memory Writing down loading program Operation mode control Setting changing password Level 2 possible functions e Reading up loading program e Program write to flash memory EEPROM r Level 3 possible functions Writing data Writing system information I O allocation Sampling trace status latch r Always possible functions 34 Reading system information Reading l O allocation information Reading event history Reading data For example if level 1 and level 2 passwords have been set only level 3 and always possible functions are enabled In this state if the level 2 password is entered the level 2 possible functions are also enabled MOIE VAV 1 Do not forget your level 1 password Otherwise you cannot release the password pro
236. pt program 2 a I O interrupt program 3 it I O interrupt program 4 B Block n 1 O interrupt program 5 3 n max 256 I O interrupt program 6 N I O interrupt program 7 I O interrupt program 8 Block 1 Sub routines Also in each program type the user program is arranged by units called blocks Internally a block definition label is present at the head of each block The program type block number and programming language information are in the block definition label there is no need for the user to be concerned with the block definition label Although the 2 programming languages of ladder diagram and SFC can be used in combination in the S2T only 1 language can be used in any 1 block MOIE VAV 1 In each program type and block there is no limit to the program capacity number of steps The only limit is the total capacity 31 5k 63 5k steps 2 The block number need not be consecutive In other words there may be vacant blocks in the sequence 1 38 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 2 User Program Configuration 2 2 System information System information is the area which stores execution control parameters and user program management information when executing a user program and occupies 0 5k steps of the user program memory The following details are included in system information 1 Program ID This is the user program identification A setting of up to 10 alphanumeric c
237. qno 9 08 Peu Ns p pura Sumer ed 8 1 8 E uorsieAuoo Lued Feat g z A a 1 9 ul y salo s pue eyep julod Burreoj 6192 GE olul y Ly JO 1 B lui ulBu l lqnop oui seau 8 1 8 13 v v uoisJeAuoo Julod Suneol i oz g L g ul y se101s pue UOISJOAUOO eer 9 6 eyep 428 out y 1 y ul erep Aug eui SH AUOO a t a 0080 v i v im qoa ul u l lqnoq bi g u y 18 e S dm ia fedis seno 8 ava v uoisienuoo 08 061 g 1 g ut y sajo s pue gyep Heug UOISJOAUOO SZ TE oyu y 14 y ul erep 0208 l v r lqnop oui sueAuoo amp 1 t9 niga v v Areuig ulBu r lqnoq 58 g ut y se10 s 9 s 9 6 pue ejep olul y ul ejep qog eui SH AUOQ a Nig v 1 Areulg 881 g Aq papeay uoreo o ay Ul jjnsaJ ay 59101 ugs L 8 6L 01 po IIOSV out Wey esjeAuoo pue y Aq pereolpul 8 osv v FE uoisjeAuoo OSV 981 5 9 unuixeu soueunueud e eui sexe 2 g ul s jols I 2 g ere a 93s poo p juawbas cel g 1 g u se1ois pue eyep SH S E ae a SEE 5193002 tt ma v F uorsienuoo uBuel lqnoq g e jueuje duioo VOL 9 8 1 8 ul v 1 v Jo juawajdwoo siz eui soo 81 Dana v v ulBu i lqnog 291 evil 9 6 a u v yo 1ueuiejduioo siz ay S910 S 8 DAN V Je jueuiej
238. r onto the 4th rung using the cursor keys the cursor can move over existing rungs only and press F6 Append The screen will then turn to an edit screen with the 4th rung leading TITE RHOdi KBB1 2 ROBHA pm d BE HH 44 4 ep Raga 5p 4 4 B 4 d 4 1 19 4 11 3 i z 4 13 ine Hex TIN ITE Cancel FI B F IB 60 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 Programming Example Move the cursor to the head of the 5th rung and start entering the program from there onward To input the Function instructions such as BIN key in Shift F3 Fun Inst to display Function instructions then select the instruction group which contains the desired instruction Screen state when Shift F3 Fun Inst has been pressed 8012 FEOS RBHl4 vam RAEO Po 4 4 OS i FRIES 083 1465 lt Hove gt 12 KI ES mm FUN B18 MOV 21 DNOT 23 DXCR 24 TINI 25 TM V INT n EC ME Zei Logic Rotate aere E qammas 3 F 4 xaalz em PURIS RAAZ mo Pe OQ j R9BB3 Po 3 m E Caper stan 1 FUN 1881 ABS 100 rg us 286 rans i 182 NES 183 DNES 787 FNEG Ing IM 185 7525 186 ASC 1 188 EIN 188 DBIN 1188 RCA 131 RH 284 FLT 295 FIX H t B L ebe vir gCtr STORE overt DS Bel Bum 5 MAZ Brith PETG Shift Rotate Kee F3 ES Hereafter w
239. red number of steps by a range such as 4 7 is because the number of steps changes due to the following conditions even for the same instruction e When using digit designation there is an increase of 1 step per 1 operand When a constant is used in a double length operand there is an increase of 1 step e When executing index modification in a constant there is an increase of 1 step The minimum execution time figure shows normal case value i e when no index modification no digit designation and normal registers are used for each operand The maximum execution time figure shows worst case value i e when direct input output registers IW OW are used for each operand etc MOIE VAV Here an overview of each instruction is given See the instruction set manual in a separate volume for details User s manual Functions 267 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language ure1604d qns pue urew jo pue sejeoipu H ana H pu3 60 0 L LI HOT H lonuoo dunp NO S Indu ueuM HOT pue sor 4 suononuisui uo Buiddiys peeds uBiu 1no samep 6010 L sor 195 qonyuo duunf 4140 01 NO Woy HN 1109 Buisues uoinisueJ 9 0 i peBueuo s indu u ym ueos JO NO V a9mep su n v NO 91 440 wo Hd 1109 Bursues uonisuei 960 i peBueuo s indu uaym ueos JO NO V aen suuin
240. reiger ye l a 1 8 7 997 946 Leier eui ul y LH 10 siueiuo eur seBusuoxa 8 1 8 Hoxq il Lie abueyoxe erep lfu r lqnoq ez zV9 9 6 18 yo siuejuoo eui ul v jo sjuejuoo eui sebueyox3 a SHOX v ebueyoxa 22 g pue g o v pue Lil Jo sjuajuoo T Jejsueg cv r ay Bursuduuoo ejep pesJe aJ Iq eui sJeJsueJ cae 8 1 8 LONG il ziel d pue uaau ulBu lqnoq Ie 8 o1 v jo sjuajuoo E 96 P ay Buisudujuoo ejep pesJe eJ Iq eui SH SUEBAL z 8 LON v 4 Jesu RUE 07 YT 9 6 g pue 1 g o v pue 1 y 10 sjuajuoo 9 g Lia Aona v Liv d Jejsuea eyep 61 1 suoljonijsul Gel G a o v Jo sjuajuoo 6 L 8 on v Jejsuen eJeg 8 EH sri peuinbo4 o eui 50 15 sewuIns uoyejuasalday N dnoio uopnoex3 o jequinN Nr suononuisu uonoun suomnonuisu UUEIDEIO 19ppe7 270 V series S2T 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION LEY g z L Aq v L y jo sjuajuoo ay sjueuie128q 1 LO E jueujeJoep ulBu lqnoq 9v 626 e z LA y Jo sjuejuoo eui sjuauie12eq wie jueueJed sy LEY 6 2 Aq v L v jo sjuajuoo ay 81 ll v 19 v LO FP jueujeJout ulBu l lqnoq rr 626 6 2 1 Aq v JO sjuajuoo eui 91 w Le ju
241. ri tu a u wnaa v jeouenbes unuq 891 ezi eniur 1v deis ay s pio p udu spiewuo uz y ae Bues en eA junoo ay uim g anjea junoo ay sereduio g uum Bues splom 9 ay l lins z 0208 ay se1ojs pue eu pue ejep Wem ay 01 y s 5012 v uone1edo jepuejeo 994 Aq papeay eyep au pue SpJOM 9 ay sjoengng 0 958 2 Sun pue 97 1epuojeo eu u Wey sjes pue amo v Tepue eojeS rei v 49181691 ay Aq papeay eyep jo spJoM 9 au S YEL 921 U9je sn1e s ay jo lE1S ay 5 Ju 1S 1959 uore SNIS EGL UO y ui WAU saJojs pue jeujueJ604d vv6 eui q 19s ze xew s1e siBa seoinap eui sexe Sus J 195 uore SNIS 251 e e1 Joyersunuue ay uo pue Oe UN 4686 091 2 2 uononajsut Kejdsip eui Aq v uviq 1ese ejdsip onsouDeiq LSL Je epoo 10119 y y epoo eui seseJ4 e1eudued ay uo paoyuou eq uso g Aq pepeeu s lqe 151 ay u 9 21 xew sobessow 10119 oul Apel Jojerounuue b eui NO suuni pue 4 lsi5 l eroeds eui a v Ovid de Keldsip a soubelq 051 ul v Aq papu epoo 410149 ay spio581 uomonujsul eu NO 01 440 wo paBueyo seu indu ueuM SVH srl p nb ol aun sdajs seuwuIns uonejueseJdeu SUEN N dnog uonnoex3 o jequinN NN
242. rigger TRG Take the criteria for the time for performing the timer register update as follows 4 us timer register update time e Updating timing relays The timing relays 80040 80047 ON OFF status is controlled by using the 10 msec system interrupt The binary counter is configured as shown on the next page When RUN is started up they will be all OFF User s manual Functions 89 2 Internal Operation PART 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 Peripheral support 90 V series S2T S0040 0 1 sec S0041 0 2 sec S0042 0 4 sec S0043 0 8 sec S0044 1 0 sec S0045 2 0 sec S0046 4 0 sec S0047 8 0 sec Peripheral support processing will interpret request commands from the peripherals programmer computer link data transmission module process the requests and responds In the S2T the Language processor LP takes charge of user program execution The peripheral support processing will be performed by the main processor during user program execution in parallel User program execution LP User program gt Scan control Mode Timer support 1 For commands which require accessing to user data the command interpretation will be performed in parallel and the data accessing will be performed at the bottom of scan at batch for data synchronization 2 If two or more commands are received simultaneously from the request sources the order of priority will be as follo
243. rite the whole program using the same procedure User s manual Functions 61 6 Programming Example PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 5 When the whole program has been written in work file in the operation up to this point load the program into the S2T First connect the S2T and the T PDS with the dedicated cable This assumes that the modules in Section 6 2 are mounted in the S2T Next put the RAM ROM switch on the CPU to RAM the operation mode switch to the RUN position and turn on power to the S2T The S2T will start up in the HALT mode 6 Put the T PDS into communication mode with the PLC S2T First return the T PDS display to the initial menu by pressing Esc Enter and then select L Online Offline r r 1 S System Information T Load Save Compare P Program D Setup Oprlans M Data Monitor L AAA E Coments M Password D Documentation H Quit U Usage Map f Current mode is Offline N F Gffilne Dfflinr t Here select N Online to select online mode Key in N 5 System Information T Load Save Compare P Program U Setup Options H Data Monitor IR nes C Comments Password D Documentation Q Quit D Esage Map i y de N Na i OFF Line RS oe Cece h H T1 HM H5 71 FF CF CR 62 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 Programming Example Confirm the connection state and key in Y biz T PHS MIME MENI
244. rmat for the expand memory They are 8 k words per bank and 64 k words per bank Refer to XFER instruction Note that the computer link command for these formats are slightly different Expanded file register Request message format Host gt S2T data read MR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 IAJ ADR MIR register zu amp Sum CR Can be shortened Can be omitted ADR Station address 01 to 32 Starting register For 8 k words per bank F0000 to F8191 Upper case F For 64 k words per bank f0000 to f65535 bank 1 Lower case f f0000 to f57343 bank 2 Bank For 8k words per bank 1 to 15 For 64k words per bank 1107 N Number of registers to be read 1 to 61 61 words max Sum Check sum Response message format S2T Host 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A ADR IM IR Data 1 Data 2 n 5 n 4 n 3 n 2 n n Data N 1 Data N amp Sum CR Data Data in hexadecimal User s manual Functions 235 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Expanded file register Request message format Host S2T data read MW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 A Starting register Bank N Data 1 Can be shortened
245. rmation EL ep s 139 USE program RT 142 Main vele EE 143 Subsprogramt E ei 144 Interrupt program cinta 146 SUDb FOUDTOS ee al ebe 149 151 152 ee EEN 152 Registers and 1 5 155 Register data types si iii iii naii ssil 180 Index modification 187 DiGi ee La ut EE 191 VO Allocation c aad 196 OVOIVIOW siesiy aa 000 196 Methods of VO alocada 197 Register and module correspondence 201 Network assignment Ae 203 Programming Language 208 Vehesv 208 Ladder aqrar eheu et mte sot heut inis 211 SEU id PU 000000 00 000000 218 Programming hee te 233 5 5 5 5 1 5 5 2 5 5 3 5 6 5 6 1 5 6 2 5 6 3 5 6 4 5 6 5 5 6 6 5 7 Contents Network support 235 Expand memory card data access through computer link titi 235 TOSLINE S20LP loop support 238 A tede eoe te ee reos 239 NSTUCION e T 9 240 Double word multiplication and division D 241 Essential PID PID3 243 Floating point essential PID FPID3 248 Expanded data transfer XFER
246. ro number and corresponds 1 to 1 to macro steps which are present in the SFC main program or other macro programs Macro programs are used for rendering the program easy to see by making the SFC program an hierarchical structure n all 128 macro programs can be created Macro entry 10 3 M 10 Bes Mesue QUI eet Exactly the same A operation 11 M 90 3 SI 6 ES 12 3 a ON 8 H N 4 is Macro end MOIE VAV 1 Macro steps can be used in macro programs SFC multi level hierarchy There is no limit to the number of levels 2 Macro programs and macro steps must correspond 1 to 1 That is to say macro steps designated with the same macro number cannot be used in multiple locations 3 Macro program should be programmed in the following location than the SFC main program macro program which has the corresponding macro step in upper numbered block SFC programming becomes possible by designating blocks and then selecting SFC by language designation Only one SFC main program or one macro program can be created in 1 block 1 SFC block Also the maximum number of SFC steps per block is 128 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language SFC elements The following is a description of the elements which compose an SFC program 1 SFC Initialization This is the function which starts up
247. rogram execution User s manual Functions 165 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Name Function SVVO16 First error code The designated error codes 1 64 are stored in order of execution SWO017 Number of registration in SW018 SW033 the earlier the code the lower the address and swo18 Error code First the 577 of registration 577 is updated e The earliest error code occurring the content of SW018 is stored SW019 Error code 2 in the leading error code SVV016 SW020 Error code 3 e The registered error codes are cancelled one by one by the swo21 Error code 4 execution of the diagnostic display reset instruction or by a reset Swo22 Error code 5 De ee is reduced by 1 and the storage SW023 Error code 6 positions of the error codes are shifted up SW024 Error code 7 SW025 Error code 8 SW026 Error code 9 SW027 Error code 10 SWO028 Error code 11 SWO029 Error code 12 swo30 Error code 13 SWO031 Error code 14 SW032 Error code 15 SW033 Error code 16 77 Name Function S0340 1 Annunciator relay 1 e The annunciator relays corresponding to the error codes registered S0341 Annunciator relay 2 in SW018 SW033 become QN S0342 Annunciator relay 3 S0343 Annunciator relay 4 S0344 Annunciator relay 5 S0345 Annunciator relay 6 S0346 Annunciator
248. rol PART 2 FUNCTIONS Cyclic mode While the start flag is ON the sub program will be executed once every designated number of scans The order of execution priority is as follows Sub 2 gt Sub 3 gt Sub 4 The start flag should be controlled ON OFF by the user program If the sub program execution cannot be completed within the designated scans the delay flag S0415 80416 S0417 is set to ON e Operation example in the floating scan n nd n m n 8 n 20 lt gt 4 AAA Scan counts Mai Ex i j Sub 2 every 3 scans LT PEINE 8 Sub 3 every 8 scans ba stopped Sub 4 7 E ub 4 every 20 scans D A Ka a wi RU o ei H aa 1 Sub 2 start 80409 yy vv I b I Sub 2 executing S0411 1 l Ls Li 9 i I I 1 YY Sub 3 start S040A Sub 3 executing S0412 v Sub 4 start 80408 ty Sub 4 executing S041 gea EE 2 r rT 1 Start requests to Sub 2 Sub 3 and Sub 4 from Main Y Sub 2 activated Sub 2 completed and Sub 3 activated Sub 3 interrupted and next scan started Sub s re started Sub 3 completed and Sub 4 activated O Sub 4 completed Sub 2 activated in the first scan of next 3 scans O Sub 2 completed Sub 3 activated in the first scan of next 8 scans Sub 3 completed Sub 4 activated in the first scan of ne
249. s C Addresses Counter registers 000 511 512 words Counter devices 000 511 512 points Functions The counter registers are used together with counter instructions CNT U D and store the current count value when the counter is operating Also the counter devices are linked to the operation of the counter registers with the same address and store the output results of counter instructions The counter registers can be designated as retentive memory areas Data registers codes D Addresses 1000 8191 8192 words Functions General purpose registers which can be used for such purposes as a temporary memory for arithmetic results and the storage of control parameters Apart from the fact that bit designation is not possible they can be used in the same way as auxiliary registers Data registers can be designated as retentive memory areas Also when a peripheral memory is used D0000 D4095 become subjects for the initial load In the memory protect state P RUN data writing to D0000 D4095 is prohibited User s manual Functions 157 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Link registers and Link device TOSLINE S20 Link registers and Link relays TOSLINE F10 File registers Index registers Codes Link registers w Link devices Z Addresses Link registers 0000 2047 204
250. s 50 steps from step number 0 and step 50 is used in that SFC program when SFC initialization is executed with step 50 in the active state step 50 will remain active On the other hand if the SFC initialization designation is 201 steps from step number 100 and step 300 is used in another SFC program when SFC initialization is executed with step 300 in the active state step 300 will become inactive without any condition PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 3 There is no limit to the step number sequence used in 1 SFC program including macro programs However the initial step must be made the lowest step number in that sequence See 2 above 4 A sequence selection diverges above transitions and converges below transitions Also a simultaneous sequence diverges above a steps and converges below a steps However the divergence must end in a corresponding convergence Therefore programs such as the following are not allowed LJ M T E E 2 1 7 Lj m L LJ Bs I E Ei User s manual Functions 231 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 232 V series S2T 5 The jump destination of a SFC jump may be either in the upward direction or in the downward direction or it may be in another SFC program Al
251. s data starting with D0000 is transferred to Bank 1 F0000 and after in the expand memory When type 06 is used in the S2T the expanded F register can be accessed as F00000 to F65535 bank 1 7 and F00000 to F57343 bank 8 User s manual Functions 255 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION CPU register S20 S20LP scan memory Example R0000 1 HA RW000 XFER Source designation RW000 H00 H01 RW001 00000 W0000 CPU register Remarks RW030 RW031 RW032 RW036 RW037 RW002 RW010 Transfer size Destination designation RVVO02 00010 RW010 H10 RWO 11 00000 Channel 1 S20 S20LP scan memory address 00000 10 words transfer When RO000 is ON 10 words data starting with W0000 is transferred to scan memory address 00000 and after of channel 1 S20 S20LP When writing data into S20 S20LP scan memory confirm that the address range is S20 S20LP s data send block If S20 S20LP scan memory is accessed only by this XFER instruction the network assignment i e LINK or GLOBAL setting is not necessary When S20 is designated as source the status flag scan healthy map for the read out data is stored in operand B 1 and after Status flag is not created for S20LP For example when 99 words data is read from S20 with using RVVO30 as transfer size designation RW031 to RWO37 7 words are used to store the scan healthy ma
252. s initial operation mode is determined by the mode control switch HALT RUN When this switch is in RUN the S2T moves into RUN mode automatically Standby The S2T stays in HALT mode regardless of the mode control switch HALT RUN after power on Then the operation mode can be changed manually i e by programmer command or by changing the mode control switch RAM ROM switch Switch Position Operation Mode RAM User program stored in RAM is used Program transfer from Flash Memory to RAM is not executed At the beginning of RUN mode user program stored in flash memory is Switch Position HALT RUN transferred to RAM It is called Initial load Mode control switch Operation Mode User program execution is stopped HALT mode Normally programming is performed in the HALT mode S2T operation mode control by programmer is not allowed S2T executes user program cyclically RUN mode It is the normal switch position under operation Even in the RUN mode program changes are possible However saving into the flash memory is available only in the HALT mode S2T operation mode control by programmer is possible 20 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 2 Operation Outline Previous state OP mode OP mode transition factor after Remarks OP mode RAM ROM Mode SW transition
253. s is set in RWO060 and instruction output comes ON MOIE VAV e Keep the input ON until the output comes ON e This instruction becomes error complete in the following cases ERF 2 S0051 is set to ON 1 Target station No is invalid for S20LP 2 Invalid register designation In case of T and C registers T gt T and C C is only possible 3 Source destination register address range is out of valid range 4 Destination register is write protected b Response time out is occurred e By using SVV067 self station s register write protect is available F 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SW067 sw C T F D Rw tw w vw 0 Write enable 1 Write protect Both F register in CPU and expanded F register in IC card e Resetting the status register operand B is necessary at the first scan e When using the TOSLINE S20LP or Ethernet module EN611 EN631 read the manual for these network modules 266 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 5 7 List of instructions An instruction list is given in the sequence of ladder diagram instructions and SFC instructions on the next page and thereafter The groups in the list correspond to the group classifications of function instructions used in the programmer T PDS Except for SFC The required numbers of steps signify the size of memory required for storing these instructions The showing of the requi
254. s set this function is disabled The start of execution can be selected from the initial start and the continue start as same as the breakpoint setting function b Stop condition setting function The S2T executes the program until the stop condition is fulfilled The checkpoint of the condition can be selected either at the end of scan or at the breakpoint The stop condition can be set as either AND or OR conditions of up to four registers devices data The start of execution can be selected from the initial start and the continue start as same as the breakpoint setting function 1 26 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 RAS Functions Notes 1 The DEBUG mode functions can also be used in combinations as follows Breakpoint setting or N scans execution Single step execution and or and or or Stop condition setting Single rung execution 2 The initial load is not performed at the mode changing from D HALT S HALT to D RUN S RUN 3 The timers used in the program are updated as normal in free scan and updated as 100 ms scan in the single step rung execution 4 The sub program execution is not interrupted in the single step rung execution n free scan it is interrupted as normal b The actions of the interrupt program are as follows At D HALT S HALT inhibited At D STOP S STOP holded executed when changed to enable At D RUN S RUN enabled Restrictions 1 The DEBUG mode
255. se X018 _ R016 10 TON T070 3 LS0 1 second delay Stop complete MCR When T 066 is ON R012 is put ON and held When 53 X01B is ON R012 is reset T 067 is put ON after LS3 X01B has been ON for 3 seconds When T 067 is ON R013 is put ON and held When LSO X018 is ON R013 is reset Cycle complete T 068 is put ON after LS0 X018 has been ON for 10 seconds The number of completed cycles are counted When they equal the value D5000 on the numerical setting device Operation complete R014 is put ON The count value C000 is converted to BCD and is outputted to the numerical display When the stop mode R002 is ON the MCS MCR is executed When LSO X018 is OFF T 069 and R015 are put ON after 1 second If LSO X018 is put ON T 069 and R015 are reset Stop complete R016 is put ON after LS0 X018 har 1 second 46 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 Programming Example Lamp Circuit Motor Circuit Program End R000 Y030 23 gt Emergency Fault stop R001 Y031 24 4 Preparation Preparation complete complete R003 Y032 25 gt Operating Operating R003 R017 26 il e Operating R000 Emergency stop R014 RO17 MES 27 4 o Operation Operation complete complete Bis R010 R000 XO1D Y040 gt Running Emer Running in Forward forward gency reverse Do Stop Running forward R012 R013 R000 01
256. smission module manual for the allocation of the link register relay W Z and L LW to the data transmission 5 With direct UO processing output will be in register units even when the bit O is specified Refer to Part 3 for direct I O 22 us register 22 us register 7 us register PART 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 3 2 Internal Operation Timer update The timer registers activated by timer instructions will be updated increased and the timing relays 80040 80047 will be updated Updating timer registers 10 msec system interrupt y y y v Y Y y v y Y Y Y y y y v v San Scan cycle de Scan cycle l e mer update cycle Her update cycl The number of system interrupts which occur during the timer update cycle scan cycle will be counted and the counts will be added up in the timer registers which are started up by the timer instructions TON TOF SS TRG The 10 msec interrupt is used for the 0 01 second timer T000 user the 10 ms interrupts are accumulated and used for the 0 1 second timer user T999 The timer reset and the time up processing will be performed in the execution of the timer instruction Timer Timer register classification Timer device Preset range Notes 0 01 second T000 T063 0 32767 On delay timer TON timer T 000 user 0 327 67 seconds Off delay timer TOF 0 1 second T064 T999 0 32767 Single shot timer SS timer user T 999 0 3276 7 seconds Timer t
257. so it is possible to jump to the outside from inside a branch Since a SFC jump can be very freely used in this way take thorough precautions so that the SFC logic will not become abnormal so that multiple unrelated steps in a series of SFC will not become active through jumping A SFC jump is always positioned immediately after a step Also although basically a SFC label is positioned immediately after a transition it is positioned between the convergence line and the step in the case of a sequence selection convergence O Ed MEC LN sa 4 2 ua 6 The states active inactive of SFC steps are not retained for povver off VVhen starting up all become inactive 7 The output of an SFC step can be controlled by sandvviching the SFC program block by ladder diagram master control MCS MSR VVhen the input of MCS is OFF the povver rail of the action program corresponding to the active step also becomes OFF Hovvever in the state step transition is carried out PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 5 4 Programming precautions The S2T supports multi task function When using this function there is the possibility of the sub program being interrupted by the main program or the interrupt program and the main program being interrupted by the interrupt program Precautionary notes arising from this are given below and should be taken into account when creating programs
258. ssed by a combination of function type and a sequence of numbers which starts from 0 this is called the address Example XW 005 Address 005 in this case it is the register address Function type XW Input register To say that the content of XW005 is 100 is to say that the numerical value 100 is stored in a location in the user data memory indicated by XVV005 Also user data is divided into registers and devices according to the type of data to be stored Although the expression relay is also used a relay should be regarded as one type of device A register is an area which stores 16 bits of data and it is expressed as a combination of a function type and a register address the register address is a decimal number Example D 1024 Register address decimal number Function type D Data register On the other hand a device is an area which stores 1 bit of data it expresses 1 or 0 in other words ON or OFF and it is expressed as a combination of a function type and a device address However a device does not use an independent memory area It is allocated as 1 bit in the 16 bits of the corresponding register Therefore the device address is expressed in the form of the corresponding register address bit position Example X 005 6 L Bit position there are 16 positions 0 F Register address decimal number Function type X Input device corresponds to input register XW PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3
259. ssion stop Transmission stop by setting ON S0789 Output inhibit Output inhibit by setting ON S078A S078B S078C 30760 Reserve for future use S078E S078F S0790 Transmission status ON during transmission S0791 Scan transmission ON during scan transmission S0792 S0793 Reserve for future use S0794 S0795 MS operation mode OFF Normal mode ON Test mode S0796 S0797 TOSLINE F10 0798 CH1 status S0799 S079A S079B S079C S079D S079E S079F Reserve for future use Referto the TOSLINE F10 manual for details 1 72 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data 2 Name Function SW080 TOSLINE F10 CH2 command e Bit assignment in the register is the same as SW078 and SVV079 SW081 TOSLINE F10 CH2 status SW082 TOSLINE F10 CH3 command SW083 TOSLINE F10 CH3 status SW084 TOSLINE F10 CH4 command SW085 TOSLINE F10 CH4 status SW086 TOSLINE F10 CH5 command SW087 TOSLINE F10 CH5 status SW088 TOSLINE F10 CH6 command SW089 TOSLINE F10 CH6 status SVV090 TOSLINE F10 CH7 command SW091 TOSLINE F10 CH7 status SW092 TOSLINE F10 CH8 command SW093 TOSLINE F10 CH8 status 0 Name Function SW094 LW000 LW015 e The corresponding bit comes ON when the LW SW095 LW016 LW031 regis
260. ssss M ssss Step number 0 4095 mmm mmmm Macro number 0 127 224 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 12 Macro Entry This expresses the start of a macro program The macro entry has no action program Steps are connected below the macro entry Only 1 macro entry can be programmed in 1 block mmm mmm Macro number 0 127 13 Macro End This expresses the end of a macro program Macro end has a transition condition which corresponds 1 to 1 and returns to the corresponding macro step when this transition condition is satisfied 14 SFC Jump This expresses a jump to any arbitrary step Jump has a jump condition which corresponds 1 to 1 and jump destination label numbers When the transition condition is satisfied the active state jumps to the step following the designated label When the jump transition condition and the transition condition for the following step are simultaneously satisfied jump has priority _ Hl 111 Label number 0 1023 SFC Jump is located immediately after a step SFC Jumps with the same label number may be present in multiple locations User s manual Functions 225 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 15 SFC Label This expresses the return destination from an SFC end and the jump destination from a SFC jump Label is located immediately after transitions III gt 111 Label number 0 102
261. suononuisu uonoun J suononuisu ureJ6eiq Jeppe User s manual Functions 283 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 00001 Ag anjea eursoo sy ul idninul pue ge 9 6 001 Aq v eui Bulpiaip Aq a soo v SOO uonoun ulsoo 21 ojBue eui Subye Aq peurejqo enjeA eui g ui selo s 00001 Ag enjeA euis sy pue ele 9 6 001 Aq v jo anjea eui Burpinip Aq peureiqo a Nis v FE NIS uonoun uls z21 ejBue y Subye Aq peurejqo enjea y g ui salo s Loi ut y se101s 2092 v pue g uu sjejeureged y Bursn y yo enjeA o 8 2014 v Old esenbs uoneiveg 121 ay 40 uome nojeo qid Nbs uoneivep au no saneo O ut y saejo s pue g uum Burners sjejeureaed ay 9068 Aq y 10 anjen ay 104 8 Old eui mo sanueo 0 8 dia v i ald 011 O ul y sajo s pue g uim Burueis sijejeurejed 067 Ly eui q y JO anjea ay 40 uoroun dwes ay 5 18 do a diva v de uonoun dwey 691 9 1 0 966 L Ul nsa eui soos pue g 1 g 40 1ueysuoo fesS lul o a oiu v fou 894 ay wo y jo anj ea eui 40 e1Ba ul ay sejenajeo 8 ul se101s pue y 1 y 288 ae ejep jo Joo eenbs eui spu j a Le des 1001 eyenbs 291 a O
262. tarted and stopped in units of one rung When this function is activated from the D HALT mode the S2T performs the user data initialization and stops at the top instruction D RUN gt D STOP When this function is activated from the D STOP mode the S2T executes the last time stopped rung and stops at the first instruction of the next rung Execution example 1 Last time stopped point E C a f rent jo Even if the rung contains the sub routine call CALL or the jump JUMP instructions the next stopping point is the next rung despite of calling or jumping Execution example 2 JUMP Last time stopped point If jump condition is not satisfied the y N 02 0 execution is stopped at the next rung If jump condition is satisfied the execution is moved to the LBL instruction LBL 02 not stopped User s manual Functions 125 5 RAS Functions PART 2 FUNCTIONS In case of the FOR NEXT loop the instructions inside the loop are executed specified times but only the first time execution can be traced as same as the single step execution Also the same precautions as the single step execution are applied to the interrupt program 4 N scans execution function The S2T executes the specified times of scans and stops at the end of the scan The scan counts is set in the execution condition setting The setting range is to 65535 If 0 i
263. tch I O processing and direct I O instruction Error registration then error down However if recovered by retries only registration will take place no error down Error registration then error down However if recovered by retries only registration will take place no error down LP function Test program run in LP Error registration then error check language processor and down checked for correct results However if recovered by retries When running the user only registration will take place program no error down LP illegal Checks whether or not illegal Error registration and then error instruction instruction is detected in LP down detection check language processor When running the user program Scan time over check Checks that scan cycle does not exceed set value 200 ms However set value can be changed by user instruction WDT When running the user program Error registration and then error down PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 RAS Functions 4 Diagnosis in any mode executed in background Items Diagnostics details Behavior when error detected System ROM The correctness of the system Error registration and then error BCC check ROM is checked by BCC down Error reset command invalid System RAM The system RAM read write is 1 Error registration and then error check checked down Error reset command invalid Peripheral LSI check Periph
264. te RAM IC card EFPUN iD System Diagnosis Key in M Next select M Clear Memory from the Memory Management menu Key in M EZ SAA Program x J Data Monitor C Coments Documentation 1 D Usage Se Y N Nu System Informatiow Clear Memory P b E s T L T PD5 UUE MENE CHemury Ha men b System Parameters E Clear Event History TA Allocation ul m Event History IF Elear Force Scan Time i Program Read Sampling Trace RAM IC rard FEPROM Status Lateh V Program Write RAM IC card EEPRON System Diagnosis 1 Ara Le Zur o Cancel i 1 4 E 4 64 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 Programming Example The programmer will await execution confirmation Execute Clear by keying in Y Ma T FIS MINE NEXU a s MARMARA lt Svstea Infarmatign P Program Hemory Management P System Parameters H M Data Monitor E Clear Event History A LU Allocation BRENT C Coments n CAE LLLA 2 Event History B Documentation iF Clear Force S Scan Tine D Usage Map R Program Read T Sampling Trace RAN IC card EEPRON L Status Latch W Program Write RAM IC card EEPRUN D System Diagnosis ERNST KE Po ta a 55 um d ei viel ai E 8
265. tection 2 Protection level for each programmer command is explained in the programmer operation manual 1 32 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 1 Overview 1 1 Aims of Part 3 1 2 User memory configuration The main functions of the S2T are to store the user program to execute the stored user program and to control and monitor the operation state of machines processes which are the result of such execution The user program is a series of instructions for achieving the request control function operation conditions data processing and the interface with the operator lt is stored in the user program memory The execution of the user program is the sequential performance of the processes of reading user data in which external input output data and control parameters are stored processing the respective instructions and storing the results of this in the user data memory Part 2 described the types of processing which are executed by the S2T internally functions for executing the user program efficiently and the RAS functions Part 3 describes the necessary information for creating user programs that is to say detailed user data detail of the input output allocation and the programming languages Also the user program configuration is described to use the S2T s multi tasking function The following diagram shows the user memory configuration of the S2T Peripheral Memor
266. ter 16000 points Z0000 Z999F Link relay device Data exchange area vvith data transmission module TOSLINE F10 4096 points L0000 L255F The address expressions for devices are as shown below Other than T and C X 063 F T and C T 255 d Bit position in the corresponding register 0 F Address of corresponding register decimal number Function code X Y I R 5 Z L decimal number Function code T C Address of corresponding register PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 5 User Data Therefore for example device X0352 expresses bit 2 of register XVVO35 and if X0352 is ON it means that bit 2 of XW035 is 1 MSB LSB FEDCBA 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 lt Bit position 1 je ut X0352 0N XW053 NOTE VAV 1 The least significant bit LSB is bit O when numerical values are handled in the register 2 When the direct input register device are used in an instruction input data will be read directly from the input module when that instruction is executed This system is called the direct input system As opposed to this in the input register XW input data will be read from the corresponding input module in a batch before user program execution This system is called the batch input system In the input output allocation an IW and XW of the same address correspond to
267. ter is not updated normally SW096 LW032 LW047 SW097 LW048 LW063 e The lowest address of LW register corresponds SW098 LW064 LW079 to bit 0 in the SW register and in the order SW099 LW080 LW095 SW100 LW096 LW111 SW101 TOSLINE F10 LW112 LW127 SW102 Scan error map LW128 LW143 SVV103 LVV144 LVV159 SVV104 LVV160 LVV175 SVV105 LVV176 LVV191 SVV106 LW192 LW207 SW107 LW208 LW223 SW108 LW224 LW239 SW109 LW240 LW255 User s manual Functions 173 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 7 Name Function S1100 Test mode ON when test mode S1101 S1102 Reserve for future use S1103 S1104 Master slave ON when master station S1105 Scan inhibit ON vvhen scan transmission inhibited S1106 S1107 1 TOSLINE S20 S1108 CH1 station status Reserve for future use 1109 S110A S110B 110C Online ON when online mode 110D Standby ON when standby mode S110E Offline ON when offline mode S110F Down ON when down mode S1110 Test mode ON when test mode S1111 S1112 Reserve for future use S1113 S1114 Master slave ON when master station S1115 Scan inhibit ON vvhen scan transmission inhibited S1116 S1117 TOSLINE S20 s1118 CH2 station status Reserve for future use S1119 S111A S111B S111C Online ON when online mode S111D Standby ON
268. terrupt from the module nearest the CPU has the highest level of priority Refer to 3 below regarding the correspondence between interrupt programs and I O modules Interrupt enable disable You can switch between interrupt disable and enable by using the DI instruction interrupt disable and El instruction interrupt enable By executing the DI instruction the interrupt conditions which occur during interrupt disable mode will be put on hold these will be then executed instantly when the interrupt enable mode is entered by executing the El instruction DI and El should be used in a pair Also in transition to RUN mode the interrupt will be disabled in the first scan lt will be enabled automatically from the second scan 3 Allocation of I O interrupt program NOTE The I O interrupt response time from the time interrupt conditions arise until interrupt program starts up vvith normal interrupt enable and no other interrupt program started up is an instruction execution time 500 us in worst case The I O interrupt with the lowest number corresponds to the I O module with interrupt function nearest the CPU in the initial state This allocation can be changed See Part 3 Section 2 3 3 There are no restrictions on the mounting position of l O modules with the interrupt function VAV User s manual Functions 103 4 Peripheral Memory Support Functions 4 1 Flash Memory EEPROM support PART 2 FUNCTIO
269. terrupt program The setting range is 1 1000 ms in 1 ms units The timer interrupt interval can be registered monitored on the system information screen of the programmer 12 Computer Link Parameters This sets and registers the parameters for the computer link The computer link parameters can be registered monitored on the system information screen of the programmer The parameter items and their setting ranges are as follows Station No N 1 32 initial value 1 Baud rate TTTTTTTTTI300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 initial value 9600 Parity Nore odd even initial value odd Data length bits T T 7 8 initial value 8 Stop bitfTLLTTHHHHH 1 2 initial value 1 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 2 User Program Configuration 13 I O Allocation Information This stores l O allocation information and unit base address designation information This information is created either by executing the automatic I O allocation command or by setting and registering an I O module type for each slot manual I O allocation on the I O allocation information screen of the programmer Interrupt Assignment Information This stores the information of correspondence between the I O interrupt program and I O modules with interrupt functions n the initial state without setting this information the lower number of I O interrupt programs are assigned in sequence from the interrupt module closest to the CPU
270. the address range through index modification When the results of index modification exceed the address range the instruction is not executed and special devices 80051 and S0064 which indicate boundary error become ON User s manual Functions 189 3 User Data 1 90 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION As explained before the main purpose of the index modification is indirect designation of register However as the special usage of the index modification the followings are also possible e For CALL and JUMP instructions indirect designation of the destination address is possible JUMP N 000 If 1 5 jump to Label 5 If indexed destination is not registered the special devices S0051 and S006C become ON If indexed destination exceeds the range the special devices 80051 and S0065 become ON And both cases the instruction is not executed e For SET and RST instructions indirect designation of device is possible SET R0100 If I H005F set RO15F to ON e For constant operand the constant value can be modified by the index register 500 MOV D5000 It 1 10 510 is stored in D5000 NOTE VAV Refer to the Instruction Set manual for the operands to which the index modification is available in each instruction PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data 3 5 Digit designation There is a method called digit designation which is a s
271. the data of DO351 D0350 is 23437688 D0262 D0261 is 1876509 and D0264 D0263 is 113487 the quotient 387542471 is stored in D0401 D0400 and the remainder 64815 is stored in D0403 D0402 D0351 D0350 23437688 D0264 D0263 D0401 D0400 387542471 x 113487 b D0403 D0402 64815 D0262 D0261 1876509 NOTE VAV Edge execution modifier is also available for this instruction 242 V series S2T PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 5 6 2 Essential PID PID3 FUN 156 PID3 Essential PID Expression input APID3 B5 C Output Function Performs PID Proportional Integral Derivative control which is a fundamental method of feed back control Pre derivative real PID algorithm This PID3 instruction has the following features e For derivative action incomplete derivative is used to suppress interference of high frequency noise and to expand the stable application range e Controllability and stability are enhanced in case of limit operation for MV by using digital PID algorithm succeeding to benefits of analog PID e Auto cascade and manual modes are supported in this instruction Digital filter is available for PV Direct reverse operation is selectable
272. the programming languages which are usable for each program type part Program type part Ladder diagram SFC Main program O O Sub program O O nterupt program O x Sub routine O x SFC action program part O x SFC transition condition part O x O Usable x Not usable SFC can be made an hierarchical structure other SFC can be made to correspond to 1 step of SFC equivalent to an SFC sub routine is used In this case a macro step PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language 5 2 Ladder diagram Mixed use can be made of the two types of programming language ladder diagram and SFC in the S2T However of these ladder diagram is the basic language which must be present in the user program Here the structure execution sequence and general items of ladder diagram instructions are explained for ladder diagram programs As explained before a user program is registered by every functional type which is called a program type Furthermore in each program type the user program is registered by one or a multiple of units called blocks Main program sub program 1 4 Program Types timer interrupt program I O interrupt programs 1 8 sub routine When commencing programming in a block to be newly registered that program is designated by the language which is used this is called language designation However in the case of ladder diagram the o
273. the same input module 3 When the direct output register device OW O are used in an instruction those data will be outputted directly to the output module when that instruction is executed This system is called the direct output system As opposed to this the contents of the output register YW will be outputted to the corresponding output module in a batch before user program execution This system is called the batch output system In the input output allocation an OW and YW of the same address correspond to the same output module Note that in the case of direct output by device O the other 15 bits in the same register OW are also directly outputted 4 See Part 3 for details of registers devices LSB Least significant bit MSB Most significant bit User s manual Functions 39 5 User Data PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 5 2 Conditions for data The user data are initialized according to the conditions in the following initialization table at power up and at transiting the RUN mode Also the leading 4k words of the data register D0000 to D4095 are the subjects of the Initial Load Therefore when the Initial Load conditions are established initialization will be carried out in the sequence Initial Load data initialization See Section 2 3 for Initial Load Register Device Initialization For forced input devices the previous state is Input registers devices XW X maintained the ot
274. til a set time has elapsed Wait step Step with alarm When transition to the following step is not carried out even if the set time has elapsed the designated alarm device becomes ON Alarm step SFC can be used in the main program and in the sub programs Here the overall composition of SFC the elements of SFC and notes on program creation are described An SFC program is composed of SFC structure action program parts and transition condition parts SFC structure Action program part Transition condition part 420 55 CH Step number An SFC structure regulates the flow of the control operation and has steps and transitions as its basic elements A step is expressed by one box as shown above Each step has its own step number Also corresponding action program parts are annexed 1 to 1 to steps Steps have the two states of active and inactive When a step is active the power rail of the corresponding action program will be ON When a step is inactive the power rail of the corresponding action program will be OFF On the other hand a transition is located between step and step and expresses the conditions for transition of the active state from the step immediately before upper step to the following step lower step Corresponding transition conditions are annexed 1 to 1 to transitions PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language For instance in the diagr
275. tion of ladder diagram The CALL instruction requires the number of the sub routine it calls CALL rs E Sub routine number User s manual Functions 149 2 User Program Configuration PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 1 50 V series S2T The following is an execution sequence when sub routines are included Program under execution Flow of execution Sub routines Heu Not Teau N 001 H CALL N 031 MOV aen 001 rh SUBR e I RETH q o By the sub routine 001 CALL instruction execution the execution shifts to sub routine 001 When it has proceeded to the RET instruction the execution returns to the instruction following the CALL instruction in When device 3 is ON the CALL instruction is executed and the execution shifts to sub routine 001 When it has proceeded to the RET instruction the execution returns to the instruction following the CALL instruction in When device is ON the CALL instruction is executed and the execution shifts to sub routine 031 When it has proceeded to the RET instruction the execution returns to the instruction following the CALL instruction in the MOV instruction in this example PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 2 User Program Configuration 2 4 Comments MOIE VAV 1 Multiple sub routines can be programmed in a block However for execution monitor by programmer 1 sub routine on 1 block is recommend
276. tive these data will be initialized by the data of the flash memory User s manual Functions 23 3 VO Allocation PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 3 1 1 O allocation 24 V series S2T As described in Section 2 3 communication between input modules or output modules and the user program is executed via the input registers and the output registers I O allocation is the determination of which address of the I O registers shall be assigned to which l O module Basically this is determined by the mounting order of the modules Therefore informing the CPU of the module mounting order is called I O allocation The following two methods are available for performing 1 O allocation Either method requires that the S2T is in the HALT mode and that the operation mode switch is in a position RUN 1 Automatic I O Allocation Execute the automatic I O allocation command to the S2T from the programmer The S2T CPU reads the module types of I O modules mounted see the table on the next page and stores this in the user program memory as allocation information 2 Manual I O Allocation Set the mounting positions and the module types of I O modules on the I O allocation screen of the programmer and write this information to the S2T Manual I O allocation is used when performing programming in a state in which not all the I O modules have been mounted or when using the unit base address settings described in Section 3 4 M
277. tores the ON OFF information for 16 points The I O register used in the user program is expressed as follows When an input register XW When an output register YW The above expresses the register address also called the register number a decimal number from 000 to 255 Also each bit called a device in the I O register is expressed as follows When a bit in an input register input device X OOE When a bit in an output register output device Y The above expresses the register address and the expresses the bit position in the register As bit positions 16 positions of 0 1 9 A B C D E F are available 26 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 3 VO Allocation 3 3 Rules for UO allocation When I O allocation is performed either by the automatic UO allocation or the manual I O allocation method the UO allocation information information on which type of module is mounted in which position is produced in the user program memory The coordination between the registers and the l O modules is decided according to the following rules 1 In the basic unit allocation is carried out from the module immediately to the right of the CPU in sequence from the lowest register address PLICXIXIX Y Y X X Y S P 21212 4141412 UIW VV VV VV VV WWW XVVO00 XW001 XW002 XW003 XW004 XW005 YVVO20 Y
278. u y seJots pue v jo slu luo2 y 101 g Aq Zu L GEET o a aa v pueq pe q 991 O ul y sajo s pue jueuunfae sy se y jo sjuajuoo UEO Z 2 8E 1 9 L t sexe YOIYM uollounj ayy spu g Aq pepeeu o a u v E uonoun i S94 u xz eui Aq peuyep uonouny ay Duer 8 u u sajo s pue v Aq p pe u 982 v 9 08 PJOM U ay 40 an eA ay sayejnojeg ebe u Av v ds 9L L g ul njea wnwuju eui ur Jajulod v saJo s 602 v pue y ur anjea uunululu ey se1ois enpeA mu a u NIN v niEA WNWIUI 691 eui 40 y Aq pepeeu lqe erep pjow u eui sayoless 1 g ul anjea wnwxew 3y ui Jajulod eui saJo s 002 v pue g ul anjea unuwixeu ey seJojs enjeA uinuuixeuu g u XVN v PL enj eA uunwixey 291 y 40 y Aq papeay lqe eyep pjow u ay sayoless Lol ut synsaJ ay sajo s pue g jo enjeA 9701 27 eu 5ulsn Tel jo slu luoo eui o1 yu Jamo e s llddy o a nv Rod uonounj sri peuinbo4 o ou 50 15 Kieuiungs uonejueseudeu N dnoio uonno xzi Jaquinn NI suononuisu uonoun J suononuisu ureJ6eiq Jeppe 284 V series S2T 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION g ul inse ay seJois pue 0001 Aq 1 s lidilinui y jo Z801 9 6 enjeA ejnjosqe ay jo
279. u OH ste ar EE M o allocation Information UO allocatlonr lees EL uL rre e Sua Po Leere a aes Eon s Ocall catiol a EE eani VO module with interrupt funchon ENNEN VO m ur tina CHECK sont a a EE toe et t dit im tdt es Index modification EE lm le ad Et ELT EET EN A LI Di E M M 294 288 289 291 292 293 81 88 89 91 104 107 108 111 143 79 80 93 138 220 226 227 72 138 227 229 231 271 74 20 23 24 26 28 73 79 75 80 81 83 102 117 122 132 140 141 142 144 169 205 20 83 169 181 128 92 93 28 31 38 59 88 89 98 102 122 145 205 207 209 211 212 213 36 28 29 30 31 36 38 59 64 88 89 92 93 98 102 122 145 208 205 207 209 211 212 213 214 38 41 104 113 115 116 130 145 150 152 153 170 179 180 224 115 86 88 193 194 195 196 202 260 271 77 79 81 84 86 88 107 117 118 120 128 146 165 Index Input register XW cc 47 161 att 182 186 188 Interrupt assignment Information 154 Interrupt enable disable re Ron ne e rd Re an ay 115 Interrupt progiallicss aaa ei te eh ete ah att enh ate ce a ek 38 89 104 113 115 116 143 145 146 138 145 146 150 152 154 155 167 231 233 235 284 L Ladder diari 40 41 100 138 137 139 146 155 EE lo AAA ETT
280. uH SUEN N dnog uolno xz NN suononuisu uonoun J suononuisu ureJ6eiq Jeppe User s manual Functions 287 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language d a 1 8 u y sajo s pue v 1 w i 0067 jo eyep julod Buneo ay Jo juaBue Ove ay spuly 1 8 Vie v LS v Bee jueBue oe Julod Buneolj g L g u y sajo s pue y 1 w SOO 96 jo ejep julod Buneo eui 10 eursoo 0e ay spuly Le 1448 SOOWS v v d euisoo oJe juiod Sureol ged a 1 8 u y sexos pue y 1 w KC 1utod au 10 euis oJe eu Spud 81 8 nisva v v N S ous ose quiod Buneot4 zzz 8 1 8 ul y sejois pue y 1 y d 9 99 ile uod Burieolu Sul id web HET oth SUIS a 1 a wa 14 F NV 1ueBuei iurod Butteolq 922 g L g u y s jols pue 9619 Hui Lei Jo ejep urod Buneoj eui 10 eursoo au Spul 8 1 8 soos v i v S09 aursoo juod Buneo y szz E 8 1 8 ul y sejo s pue 1 6666 4V 1 v Jo ep urod eui 10 euis eui spur 8 1 8 Nis v 1 v NIS euis od Duneoi4 res 9 9 ul y sesos pue g L g yum did esenbs KE v Butuels sjejeurered Bursn y 1 w eyep urod Buneoy 9 1 9 8 1 8 zalda v i v uowemep jurod Guneo y 22 y 40 uone nojeo qid
281. uch as switching OFF the motive power circuit User s manual Functions 67 6 Programming Example PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING Select R RUN from the menu window i X88160 Po 15 j P BEB 11 lt i Beane mee Ronal X R18 regal ij xaa 3 RBORI 208 16 REAGA rZ tH HAM i T cs i mi 13 i XBR12 RAGE metz o Pop XHON3 4 jn i 1 5 i 2 3 4 5 The programmer will await execution confirmation key in Y after rechecking the safety of the surroundings PLC RUN will be displayed on the screen This is the monitor screen for the program execution state Perform confirmation of operation by using the external simulation switch and the T PDS simulation input function Force function For operation see separate T PDS operation manual When carrying out program correction modification stop the S2T temporarily put into the HALT mode and correct modify the program in the S2T When carrying out creation modification of the program while still in the online mode the operations are the same as in to offline mode 68 V series S2T PART 1 BASIC PROGRAMMING 6 Programming Example 10 When program correction and operation check are completed save the program in the disk and switch OFF the S2T power To finish with the T PDS press Esc Enter and select Q Quit in the state with the initial menu displayed
282. ueseJdeH N 2 dnoio uonn xz JjequinwN suononulsu 94S 290 V series S2T 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 0 0 ueJ60Jd oew Jo yes sejeoipu Anua oJ9e N W uuu duinf 54S eut uo uoeursep dun eui eo H e JO pua 34S y UO uorpeurisep Unie eui sejeoipu io 18981 24S lege uonipuoo SISeq 3 99 euo oj euo e uo puodsaeuoo yolym uonipuoo uonisuedn pue ove z suleluo oew ay jo pue ay sejeorpu SISeq auo 0 uo e uo puodsauloo uonipuoo duunf surejuo 608 0 e KR e q pei SC dunr 94S HIDUO9 eui usym III Aq pejeorpul l qe eui o sdunf dos peuisep o seyeoipu SISeq UO 01 UO e uonipuoo uo puodsaJ109 uornipuoo uonisueJi surejuo en I 699 Dutpnjoxe eo uon pu3 04S 1 puo9 uonisueJi ey ueym LLL L AQ pereorpur e Jeqe eui o sdunf wesBoid 24S jo pue ay seieorpu uonipuoo SISEQ 9uo o euo 299 e uo 5 yolym uoriipuoo uornisueJ surejuoo UO ISUBAL Sd S U M Q UO ISUBA JO uonipuoo eui sejeoripu dister srl p nb ol peunbe eu sd ls reuiung uoneyu s sd v SUEN N dnog 1 qWNN NN suononuisu DIS User s manual Functions 291 PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 5 Programming Language II
283. unction is activated from the D STOP mode S2T executes the last time stopped instruction and stops at the next instruction Execution example 1 HHH Last time stopped point Lem Executes the last time stopped instruction and stops at the next instruction User s manual Functions 123 5 RAS Functions PART 2 FUNCTIONS If execution is stopped at the sub routine call instruction CALL and if the sub routine call condition is satisfied the next stop point is the corresponding sub routine entry SUBR Execution example 2 CALL RET CALL N 01 SUBR 01 HH HH As same as above if execution is stopped at the jump instruction JUMP and if the jump condition is satisfied the next stop point is the corresponding label instruction LBL In case of the FOR NEXT loop the instructions inside the loop are executed specified times but the execution trace is not possible The first time execution status is displayed and the execution is stopped at the next instruction to the loop Execution example 3 FOR NEXT HL FOR 10 Executed 10 times T but the first time 4 execution status is displayed NEXT AY gt The interrupt program is executed during the single step execution but it is not traced 1 24 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 RAS Functions 8 Single rung execution function The execution is s
284. ut A 1 A Da B 1 B gt C 1 C Output When the input is ON the data of 4 1 A is multiplied by the data of B 1 B and the product is divided by B 3 B 2 then the quotient is stored in C 1 C and the remainder in C 3 C 2 The data range is 2147483648 to 2147483647 If the result quotient is out of the data range the following limit value is stored Positive overflow quotient 2147483647 remainder 0 Negative overflow quotient 2147483647 remainder 0 Execution condition Input Operation Output ERF OFF No execution OFF ON B 3 B 2 no overflow Normal execution ON B 3 B 2 0 overflow Limit ON ON B 3 B 2 0 No execution OFF ON Operand Device Register Con index stant Name YISILIRIZIT C llO X YISILIRIWNITICIDIF ITO TL J IK VV VV IVV WW WIW A anon NININ IN IN Y 14 data Multiplier B Vu NN IN IN N IN JN IN JN N y divisor C Result TN y Example R0200 1 H D0351 D0350 D 0262 00261 gt DO40 D0400 When R0200 is ON the double word data of DO351 D0350 is multiplied by the data of D0262 D0261 and the product is divided by the data of 00264 00263 then the quotient is stored in D0401 D0400 and the remainder in D0403 D0402 User s manual Functions 241 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION If
285. ution and l O processing are halted In the HALT mode the mode control is run periodically every 50 ms idle time is shared to peripheral support and diagnostic control Externally this is the mode for creating amending user programs After initial load where necessary user data initialization where necessary I O module mounting check user program check and scan mode decisions S2T goes into the RUN mode Mode control batch I O processing timer update and user program execution are run repeatedly in the RUN mode This is called scan control There are 2 scanning methods the floating scan repeats program execution continuously and the constant scan repeats program execution in a fixed cycle Selection is called scan mode selection Scan control is explained in detail in 2 4 This is the forced run mode It differs from the above RUN mode in that scan control begins even if the allocated I O modules are not actually mounted If other modules are mounted instead the mode will not run Otherwise action is the same as the above RUN mode This is the scan temporary stop mode Only the batch I O processing is run the timer update and the user program execution are halted The scan mode continues from the status previously reached The I O module test can be performed by the data monitor set function This is the mode which may be used for program debugging functions single step execution single rung execution N scan execution
286. utput module is determined except for modules which have the designation attached when allocating An output device expresses 1 bit of an output register User s manual Functions 155 3 User Data PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION Direct input registers and Direct input devices Direct output registers and Direct output devices Auxiliary registers and Auxiliary devices Codes Direct input registers IW Direct input devices Addresses Functions Direct input registers 000 511 correspond to input registers XW Direct input devices 0000 511F correspond to input devices X Direct input registers direct input devices do not themselves indicate specific memories When the instruction which uses these registers devices is executed they operate and read data directly from the input module corresponding to the address These registers devices are used when using the S2T as the direct input output system direct system and not the batch input output system refresh system Example 10000 1 NO contact instruction of 10000 When executing the instruction the bit data corresponding to X0000 is read from the input module and the instruction is executed by this data The X0000 data is not affected 11W005 MOV RW 100 Transfer instruction fromIW005 to RW100 When executing the instruction the word data corresponding to XW005 is read from the input module and is tr
287. v AHISOci 4 10 01 NO Woy paBueyo SI y NE joe uo9 Bursues uonisuei 960 l pu NO S 1ndui U UM UE S JO NO 1ndino sun v AHEB N NO 0 440 wo peBueuo si y lA p a oej1uoo Burisues uonisuei l 960 pue NO S 1ndui u uA 4825 JO NO indino sun v AHSOci e 1 810 y ui s uo s pue ajejs indu eui sueAu v 1109 H AU V Jl 60 0 9jeis indu ay sueAu 4 JeyueAu v 6070 L 330 19 NO Sl H 109 pe2404 indu Jeyjeym ss jp eb y eoiep jo ejeis sulejey v 8L0 L NO S Indu ueuw NO v eoiep sayojms K d 1109 V 440 S ueos siy ui Indu pue NO S 4895 9 0 i snoad ay ul Indu ueym luo NO indino sayoims m n Butlle Ioeluoo PUONISUP AL NO SI UEOS silu ui 1nd l ay pue 440 S ueos 960 L snoad y ul Indu ueym juo NO indino say9ims HE bus in ioeyupo jeuohisuen 60 0 L pesojo Ajeuuou 1981002 y ao1nap Jo 12e1u09 ON 1 1081 09 ON u do Aj euuou 19e u09 y asinap Jo opluoo oe uoo u 6010 L ll pe V IA D JO Jor ON y ye ON eouenbeg sn ol peunbej oul sd ls tewuns uolyejuasaiday N dnog Jo Jequiny NI suononujsu eouenbes suononujsu LUEIDEIO Jeppe 268 V series S2T 5 Programming Language PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION au sejeAnoe pue y Aq payloads 19481691 E e Jeun Sen NO 01 440 Wo
288. ve When mode is changed from manual to auto or cascade the operation is started from the current MV e Cascade mode This is a mode for PID cascade connection PID is executed with CSV as set value Different from the auto mode set value differential limit is not effective Manipulation value upper lower limit MH ML and differential limit DMV are effective Bump less changing from cascade mode to manual mode is available Manual mode manipulation value MMV is over written by current MV automatically MMV MV And bump less changing from cascade mode to auto mode is available Auto mode set value ASV is over written by current CSV automatically ASV CSV e MV tracking This function is available in auto and cascade modes When the tracking designation A 5 bit 2 is ON tracking input TMV is directly output as MV Manipulation value upper lower limit MH ML is effective but differential limit DMV is not effective When the tracking designation is changed to OFF the operation is started from the current MV MOIE VAV PID3 instruction is only usable on the main program e PID3 instruction must be used under the constant scan mode The constant scan interval can be selected in the range of 10 to 200 ms 10 ms increments e The data handled by the PID3 instruction are units Therefore process input value PVC manipulation value MV etc should be converted to 96 units scaling before and or after the PID3 instructi
289. vision instruction operation continues S0069 BOD data error Warning ON when fault data detected by BCD instruction operation continues S006A Table operation error Warning ON when table limits exceeded by table operation instruction operation continues S006B Encode error Warning ON when error occurs by encode instruction operation continues Address registration error ON when destination for CALL instruction or JUMP instruction S006C N e Warning unregistered operation continues S006D Nesting error Warning ON when nesting exceeded by CALL instruction FOR instruction or MCSn instruction operation continues S006E Reserve for future use S006F 1 The error flags are reset at the beginning of RUN mode 2 For warning flags resetting by user program is possible desi Name Function SVV007 Calendar data Year Last 2 digits of the calendar year 91 92 SVV008 Calendar data Month Month 01 12 SW009 Calendar data Day Day 01 31 SW010 Calendar data Hour Hour 00 23 Stored in lower 8 bits SVVO11 Calendar data Minute Minute 00 59 by BCD code SW012 Calendar data Second Second 00 59 SW013 Calendar data Day of the week on p mondays 1 The clock calendar data setting is performed by calendar setting instruction CLND or by calendar setting operation by programmer It is ineffective to write data directly to the special re
290. w The contents of the event history table are remained until executing the event history clear command or the memory clear command from the programmer Event History gt 1 Date Tise Event Comt Info L Infe Z infe 3 Node 34 05 88 16 56 82 System power on 1 INIT 81 85 8B 16 55 25 System power off 1 41 01 81 21 55 29 System power on 1 34 84 E1 21 54 52 System power aff 1 34 84 01 21 52 21 1 0 no answer 5 m i 802 RUM QI 34 B4 81 17 11 BB System power un 1 934 84 Hi 17 85 12 System power off i 84 84 R 18 42 16 Ne ERQ TRET errer 1 D CO J c gt Lrt h C PS gt gt 81 Bad2n WALT EM PUD IT 20N J EXT antra KET i 2 4 5 1 The meaning of each item on the screen above is as follows 1 Number 1 30 Indicates the order of occurrence Number one is the most recent 2 Date year month day Indicates the date of occurrence This is shown as if the RTC LSI is abnormal 3 Time hours minutes seconds Indicates the time of occurrence This is shown as if the RTC LSI is abnormal PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 RAS Functions 4 Event Indicates the sort of error detected System power on and system power off are also registered 5 Count Indicates the number of times the error was detected For example an error is detected during a process the retry is repeated 4 times the malfunction does not change and it goes to error down This is indicated as count 5 and DOW
291. will be executed after the main program execution with time limit user setting And in the constant scan the sub program will be executed in idle time from completion of the main program execution to the beginning of the next scan By means of sub programs the main program can be used as fast scanning task and the sub programs as slow scanning background tasks Interrupt programs 9 When the interrupt condition is fulfilled the S2T will stop other operations and execute the corresponding interrupt program immediately A total of 5 are provided one program which starts up at specified intervals Timer interrupt program and 8 programs which start up according to interrupt signals from I O modules with an interrupt function I O interrupt programs 1 8 By means of timer interrupt time critical control can be achieved and by means of I O interrupts I O responses can take place without affecting the scan cycle The sub programs and the interrupt programs execution method and the execution conditions are explained in this section PART 2 FUNCTIONS 3 User Program Execution Control 3 2 Main sub programs execution control Four sub programs Sub 1 to Sub 4 can be registered They will be executed according to the conditions described in the table below Sub 1 will be executed only once before the main program execution in the first scan The function of Sub 2 can be selected from the normal mode or special mode Sub 3
292. wo hazard classifications are used to explain the safety precautions N WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices Even a precaution is classified as CAUTION it may cause serious results depending on the situation Observe all the safety precautions described on this manual Before reading this manual Safety Precautions Installation N CAUTION 1 Excess temperature humidity vibration shocks or dusty and corrosive gas environment can cause electrical shock fire or malfunction Install and use the S2T and in the environment described in the S2T User s Manual Hardware 2 Improper installation directions or insufficient installation can cause fire or the units to drop Install the S2T in accordance with the instructions described in the S2T User s Manual Hardware 3 Turn off power before installing or removing any units modules or terminal blocks Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the S2T and related equipment 4 Entering wire scraps or other foreign debris into to the S2T and related equipment can cause fire or malfunction Pay attention to prevent entering them into the S2T and related equipment during installation and wiring Wirin
293. ws Programmer Computer link TOSLINE S20 CH1 TOSLINE S20 CH2 PART 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Internal Operation 2 6 Programming support functions The programming support functions are part of the functions realized as a result of peripheral support processing Detailed programming support functions are explained in separate manuals for the programmer The explanation here relates to an overview of the functions and their relation to the S2T operation modes 1 Memory clear When the memory clear command is received the content of the user program memory RAM will be initialized and the content of the user data memory RAM will be cleared to O 2 Automatic allocation When the automatic UO allocation command is received the types of I O modules mounted will be read and the I O allocation information will be stored on the system information System information is in the user program memory T ages co Reading the I O allocation information The I O allocation information will be read from the system information and sent to the peripherals 4 Writing I O allocation information UO allocation information received from peripherals is stored on the system information b Reading the system information The system information program ID retentive memory specification number of steps used scan mode specification other is read and sent to the peripherals 6 Writing system information The system informat
294. ws an example of the operation when index modification is applied to a program Example X0010 cooo 3 gt D2001 D2000 l D2000 Mov 1 XVV005 Mov D3000 11 xwoto mov D3000 K 0 11 xwo12 mov D3000 The following processing is carried out when X0010 changes from OFF to ON Substitute 3 times the value of the content of C000 in index register Q Store content of XW005 in D 3000 1 Add 1 to the content of and store content of XW010 in D 3000 Add a further 1 to the content of and store content of XW012 in D 3000 1 Incidentally P Fis positive transition sensing contact which becomes ON once only when device changes from OFF to ON until the instruction is executed in the next scan 8 x Cle H is multiplication instruction which multiplies by B and stores it in double length register 1 10 H is increment instruction which adds 1 to the content of 2 and stores it in MOV B is a data transfer instruction which substitutes the content of in B NOTE VAV 1 Substitutions of values to index registers and index modification may be carried out any number of times during a program Therefore normally the program will be easier to see if a value substitution to an index register is executed immediately before index modification 2 Be careful that the registers do not exceed
295. xt 20 scans Sub 4 completed 1 00 V series S2T PART 2 FUNCTIONS 3 User Program Execution Control e Operation example in the constant scan Sub 3 and Sub 4 are omitted I Scan counts y n tlO ME nd I Main Mio 5 0 ENT 21 2 PB y 9 P Sub 2 start S0409 v v v v Subi 2 executing S0411 Ls Sub 2 every 10 scans Start request to Sub 2 from Main Sub 2 activated Sub 2 interrupted Sub 2 re started Sub 2 interrupted Sub 2 re started O Sub 2 completed Sub 2 activated in the first scan of the next 10 scans O Sub 2 interrupted Sub 2 re started Sub 2 interrupted Sub 2 re started Sub 2 completed User s manual Functions 101 3 User Program Execution Control PART 2 FUNCTIONS 3 3 Interrupt programs When the interrupt condition is fulfilled the S2T will stop other execution control operations and execute the corresponding interrupt program immediately As shown below you can register one timer interrupt program which starts up according to an interval setup in system information and 8 UO interrupt programs which start up according to interrupt signals from I O modules with an interrupt function Interrupt program Operation Activated according to the interrupt interval setup in Timer interrupt system information The interrupt interval is set at 2 to 1000 ms 1 ms units
296. y Main Memory EEPROM User program User program memory memory 32k 64k steps 32k 64k steps User data User data memory memory Expand Memory XW YW RW D RW T C P T C D W LW 27575 SW E LJ Rp User data memory ri expanded F register H User s manual Functions 135 1 Overview PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 1 36 V series S2T The memory which can be used by user is called user memory The user memory can be divided by configuration into main memory and peripheral memory And the user memory can be divided by function into user program memory and user data memory The main memory is a built in RAM memory with battery backed up On the other hand the peripheral memory is an optional memory configured by flash memory The peripheral memory can be used as back up for main memory user program and register data The user program memory has a capacity of 32k 64k steps step is a unit for instruction storage and stores a series of instructions created by ladder diagram or SFC The user data memory stores variable data for user program execution It is separated by function into input output registers data registers etc PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 2 User Program Configuration 2 1 Overview The user program memory can be divided into the system information storage area the user program storage area and comments storage area as shown
297. y adding 200 0000 1001 1000 1001 binary H0989 2441 decimal Therefore the data below is stored in the 3 digits 12 bits started with R1200 1001 1000 1001 binary H989 2441 decimal PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 3 User Data For a double length 32 bits operand all QO to Q8 are available Example 3 Q6 D8001 D8000 DMOV R0508 Double length transfer F 8 7 0 F 0 D8001 D8000 gnored RW051 RVVO50 Unchanged NOTE VAV 1 Be careful that the result of digit designation does not exceed the address range When the result of digit designation exceeds the address range the excess portion will be ignored 2 A combination of digit designation and index modification can also be used Example 1 If I HOO1C it signifies the same Q1 R0000 R001C User s manual Functions 195 4 VO Allocation PART 3 PROGRAMMING INFORMATION 4 1 Overview The state of external input signals inputted to input modules is read via the input registers devices XW X or when scan control is executed On the other hand the output data determined in user program execution are outputted to output modules via output registers devices YW Y or OW O and outputs from the output modules to external loads are based on these data UO allocation is the execution of mapping between input registers devices and input modules and of mapping between output registers devices and output
298. y of the S2T CPU module is used for the sampling buffer The sampling buffer size is 8k words fixed The sampling targets registers devices are selected from the following combinations Q 3 registers 8 devices Q 7 registers 8 devices In case of D 256 times per 1 k words max 2048 times of collection is available In case of 9 128 times per 1 k words max 1024 times of collection is available PART 2 FUNCTIONS 5 RAS Functions Sampling condition There are the arm condition and the trigger condition for the sampling trace execution conditions The arm condition consists of the start condition and the stop condition When the start condition is fulfilled the data collection is started And when the stop condition is fulfilled the data collection is stopped However if the after counts is added to the stop condition the arm condition is extended for specified counts of scans after the stop condition is fulfilled The trigger condition specifies the timing of the data collection That is the data collection is carried out at the moment of the trigger condition is fulfilled while the arm condition is fulfilled The sampling target and the condition are set on the programmer screen below Setting is available when the S2T is in HALT mode or the sampling trace is disabled by pressing F2 Disable 1 Buffer Size 8 kilurds 7 Sampling Type 7 registers B devices 3 registers S devices 3 Are Conditien Start

S2T User Manual Part 2 - Automated Electric Systems Ltd

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents